“Bibliography of Child Language” in “Leopold’s Bibliography of Child Language”
Bibliography of Child Language
Abrahamsen, D. (1938) The function of language and its development in early childhood. Act. Psychiat. Neurol.,13. (*)
Achilles, R. F. (1955) Communicative anomalies of individuals with cerebral palsy: 1. Analysis of communicative processes in 151 cases of cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 16(5), 15-24. (AP) (LP) (*)
Achilles, R. F. (1956) Communicative anomalies of individuals with cerebral palsy: 2. Analysis of communicative processes of 90 athetoids as compared with 61 cases of other types of cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 17, 19-26. (E) (AP) (X) (*)
Adams, H. M., & Glasner, P. J. (1954) Emotional involvement in some forms of mutism. J. speech hear. Disord., 19, 59-69. (E) (BG) (MU)
Adams, S. (1932) A study of the growth of language between two and four years. J. fuv. Res., 16, 269-277. (E) (BG) (FQ) (*)
Adams, S. (1938) Analysis of verb forms in the speech of young children, and their relation to the language learning process. J. exp. Educ., 7, 141-144. (E)(FQ) (PS-V) (*)
Afonskiy, F. S. (1928) Yazyk shkol’nika. Rodnoy yazyk v shkole, No. 2. (R) (GC-C) (PS-PP) (SY) (*)
Ainsworth, S. (1963) Recent research in speech pathology. Except. Child., 29, 365-370. (LP) (RL) (*)
Ajuriaguerra, J. de, Inhelder, B., & Sinclair, H. (1965) L’ontogenèse du langage. Rev. Praticien, 15, 2240-2251. (RL) (TH)
Alajouanine, T., & Lhermitte, F. ( 1965) Acquired aphasia in childhood. Brain, 88, 653-662. (A) (*)
Ålander, A. T. (1943) Studier över konsonanterna i barnspråket, med ett tillägg om vokalerna. Nysvenska Stud., 23, 64-123. (SW) (PH) (*)
Albright, R. W., & Albright, J. B. (1956) The phonology of a two-year-old child. Word, 12, 382-390. (E) (BG) (PH)
Albright, R. W., & Albright, J. B. (1958) Application of descriptive linguistics to child language. J. speech hear. Res., 1, 257-262. (E) (BG) (ME) (PH) (TH)
Alcott, A. B. (1830) Observations on the principles and methods of infant instruction. Boston, Carter & Hendee. (E) (BG) (*)
Aldrich, C. A., Sung, C., & Knop, C. (1945a) The crying of newly born babies: 2. The individual phase. J. Pediatr., 27, 89-96. (CR) (*)
Aldrich, C. A., Sung, C., & Knop, C. (1945b) The crying of newly born babies: 3. The early period at home. J. Pediatr., 27, 428-435. (CR) (*)
Aleksandrov, A. I. (1883) Detskaya rech’. Russ. filol. vestnik, 10, 86-120. (R) (BG) (FW) (PH) (V)
Aleksandrovskaya, M. A. (1955) Nedostatki proiznosheniya u detey starshego doshkol’nogo vozrasta. Dissert., Leningrad. (R) (PD) (*)
Allaire, (1884) Des premiers rudiments du langage enfantin. Bull. Soc. Anthrop. Paris, 484-490. (F) (*)
Allen, M. A. (1893) Notes on the development of a child’s language. Mothers’ Nursery Guide. (E) (BG) (*)
Altus, G. T. (1953) W. I. S. C. patterns of a selective sampling of bilingual school children. J. genet. Psychol., 83, 241-248. (E) (SP) (ML) (*)
Alyakrinskiy, V. V. (1963) Imitatziya det’mi (4-7 let) russkikh i nekotorykh angliyskikh glasnykh. Vopr. psikhol., 9(1), 80-88. (R) (X) (I) (PH)
Ament, W. (1899) Die Entwicklung von Sprechen und Denken beim Kinde. Leipzig, Ernst Wunderlich. (G) (BG) (BI) (FW) (GC) (PH) (PS) (V)
Ament, W. (1902a) Begriff und Begriffe der Kindersprache. Berlin, Schiller-Ziehensche Sammlung 5, Heft 4. (G) (*)
Ament, W. (1902b) Kind und Ursprache. Pädag.-psychol. Stud., 3, 41-44. (TH) (*)
Ament, W. (1906) Fortschritte der Kinderseelenkunde 1895-1903. Leipzig. [2nd ed.] (BI) (RL) (*)
Ament, W. (1907) Eine erste Blütezeit der Kinderpsychologie um die Wende des 18. zum 19. Jahrhundert. Z. pädag. Psychol., 9. (RL) (*)
Ament, W. (1909) Zur Geschichte der Deutung der ersten Kinderworte (Intellektualismus und Voluntarismus). Bamberg, Buchner. (G) (FW) (TH) (*)
Ames, L. B. (1952) The sense of self of nursery school children as manifested by their verbal behavior. J. genet. Psychol, 81, 193-232. (E) (PS—P)
Ammons, R. B., Arnold, P. R., & Hermann, R. J. (1950) The full-range picture vocabulary test: 4. Results for a white school population. J. clin. Psychol, 6, 164-169. (E) (ME) (V) (*)
Ammons, R. B., & Holmes, J. C. (1949) The full-range picture vocabulary test: 3. Results for a preschool-age population. Child Develpm., 20, 5-14. (E) (ME) (V) (*)
Anastasi, A., & D’Angelo, R. Y. (1952) A comparison of Negro and white preschool children in language development and Goodenough Draw-a-Man I. Q. J. genet. Psychol., 81, 147-165. (E) (SO) (*)
Anastasi, A., & de Jesus, C. (1953) Language development and nonverbal I.Q. of Puerto Rican preschool children in New York City. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol, 48, 357-366. (E) (S) (SO) (*)
Anderson, F. J. (1942) Speech sounds of infants: The 16th, 17th, and 18th months. Unpubl. mast, dissert., State Univer. Iowa. (E) (PH) (*)
Anderson, J. E. (1937) An evaluation of various indices of linguistic development. Child Develpm., 8, 62-68. (E) (ME) (*)
Anderson, J. E. (1939) The development of spoken language. Yearb. natl Soc. Stud. Educ., 38(1), 211-224. (E) (*)
Anderson, T. (1965) A new focus on the bilingual child. Mod. Lang. J., 49, 156-160. (ML) (*)
Anfroy, L., & Anfroy, E. (1907) Enquête relative au vocabulaire connu des enfants. Bull. Soc. Libre Étud. Psychol. Enfant, No. 35. (F) (V) (*)
Anfroy, L., & Anfroy, E. (1912) Recherches sur l’arrangement des mots dans le langage des enfants. Bull. Soc. Alfred Binet, No. 77. (F) (SY) (*)
Angelocci, A. A., Kopp, G. A., & Holbrook, A. (1964) The vowel formants of deaf and normal-hearing eleven- to fourteen-year-old boys. J. speech hear. Disord29, 156-170. (E) (D) (PH) (*)
Anisfeld, M., & Lambert, W. E. (1960) Evaluational reactions of bilingual and monolingual children to spoken languages. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol., 69, 89-97. (E) (F) (X) (ML) (SO)
Anisfeld, M., & Tucker, G. R. (1967) English pluralization rules of six-year-old children. Child Develpm., 38, 1201-1217. (E) (GC-N) (PS-N) (X)
Annen, I. (1933) The construction, analysis, and evaluation of a vocabulary measure. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Univer. Ore. (E) (V) (*)
Anonymous. (1911) David’s vocabulary till three years old. Child Life, 13, 22-24. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Anonymous. (1939) Rapport over een onderzoek naar de woordenschat van leerlingen van een aantaal openbare scholen te Rotterdam, ingesteld bij hun toelating tot de aanvangsklassen dezer scholen in Maart en September 1938. Groningen. (DU) (V) (X)
Anonymous. (1956) Československá Logopedie. [Anthology.] Prague. (CZ) (D) (PD) (PH) (SD) (ST) (TH)
Anonymous. (1957) Vysoké školy pedagogicke. [Anthology.] Prague. (CZ) (D) (PD) (PH) (SD) (ST) (TH)
Anonymous. (1960) Dyslalie. [Anthology.] Prague. (CZ) (PD)
Anonymous. (1961) Logopedie ve výchove a vzdelani. [Anthology.] Prague. (CZ) (PD) (PH) (SD)
Anonymous. (1965) Bilingualism and the bilingual child: A symposium. Mod. Lang. J., 49. [Special issue.] (ML) (*)
Anonymous. (1966) Aktuální problemy logopedie. [Anthology.] Prague. (CZ) (D) (PD) (PH) (SD)
Applegate, J. R. (1961) Phonological rules of a subdialect of English. Word, 17, 186-193. (E) (BG) (DI) (PH) (*)
Arnold, G. E. (1961) The genetic background of developmental language disorders. Folia Phoniatrien 13, 246-254. (AP) (LP) (*)
Arnold, J. W. (1947) The language of delinquent boys. Amer. Speech, 22, 120-123. (E) (DI) (SO) (*)
Aron, M. L. (1962) The nature and incidence of stuttering among a Bantu group of school-going children. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 116-128. (AF) (ST) (X) (BA) (SX)
Arsenian, S. (1937) Bilingualism and mental development: A study of the intelligence and the social background of bilingual children in New York City. New York, Teach. Coll., Columbia Univer. (BI) (ML)
Arsenian, S. (1945) Bilingualism in the post-war world. Psychol. Bull., 42, 65-86. (BI) (ML)
Asch, S. E., & Nerlove, H. (1960) The development of double function terms in children: An exploratory investigaton. In Perspectives in psychological theory: Essays in honor of Heinz Werner, ed. by B. Kaplan & S. Wapner, 47-60. New York, Internatl Univer. Press. (E) (X) (PS-A) (SS)
Aungst, L. F., & Frick, J. V. (1964) Auditory discrimination ability and consistency of articulation of /r/. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 76-85. (E) (PD) (PH) (SP) (X) (*)
Avalishvili, W. (1950) The development of a child’s speech until age four. [In Georgian.] Psikhologiya (Tbilisi), 7. (GE) (BG) (*)
Avant, V., & Hutton, C. (1962) Passage for speech screening in upper elementary grades. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 40-46. (E) (PD) (PH) (X)
Avram, A. (1961) Remarques sur la substitution des sons dans le langage enfantin. Proc. 4th Internatl Cong. phon Sci. (Helsinki), 343-346. (RO) (AC) (PH)
Avram, A. (1962) Sistem general si sistem individual in vorbirea copilului. Probleme Ling. gen., 4, 19-25. (RO) (BT) (GC) (HO) (IM) (PH) (*)
B
Bachmann, F. (1927) Über congenitale Wortblindheit. Berlin, Karger. (A) (*)
Bain, R. (1936) The self- and other-words of a child. Amer. J. Sociol., 41, 767-775. (E) (BG) (PS-P) (V)
Balassa, J. (1893) A gyermek nyelvének fejlödése. Nyelvtudományi Közlémenyek, 23, 60-73, 129-144. (H) (*)
Bandura, A., & Harris, M. B. (1966) Modification of syntactic style. J. exp Child Psychol, 4, 341-352. (E) (GC-M) (PS-PP) (SY) (X)
Bangs, T. E. (1961) Evaluating children with language delay. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 6-18. (SD) (TH)
Bankson, N. W., & Byrne, M. C. (1962) The relationship between missing teeth and selected consonant sounds. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 341-348. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X)
Barabashova, Z. I. (1956) Kharakteristika uslovnykh svyazey na slovesnyye razdrazhiteli u detey rannego vozrasta. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 75. (R) (X) (RS) (*)
Bar-Adon, A. (1959) Lešonam hameduberet šel hayeladim beyisrael (Children’s Hebrew in Israel). Unpubl. doct. dissert., Hebrew Univer. Jerusalem. (HE) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (*)
Barbelenet, D. (1918) Sur l’apparition d’un son nouveau dans le langage d’un enfant. Bull Soc. Ling. Paris, 21, 34-37. (F) (PH) (*)
Barbier, (1907) Ertaubung und Verlust der Sprache. Z. Kinderforsch., 12, 208-215. (G) (D) (*)
Barker, J. O. (1960) A numerical measure of articulation. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 79-88. (E) (ME) (PH) (RL) (X)
Barker, J., & England, G. (1962) A numerical measure of articulation: Further developments. J. speech hear Disord., 27, 23-27. (E) (ME) (PH)
Barnes, W. (1930) Language as behavior. Elem. Eng. Rev., 7, 241-245. (SO) (TH) (*)
Barnes, W. (1931) Language as behavior. Elem. Eng. Rev., 8, 14-17, 24, 44-46, 48. (SO) (TH) (*)
Barnes, W. (1937) Language as social behavior. Educ. Meth., 16, 275-288. (SO) (TH) (*)
Bartoš, L. (1959) Observations sur les réalisations phonétiques dans le langage d’un enfant de deux ans. Sbornik Praci Fil. Fakulty Brnenske Univer., A7, 5-19. (CZ) (PH)
Basser, L. S. (1962) Hemiplegia of early onset and the faculty of speech with special reference to the effects of hemispherectomy. Brain, 85, 427-460. (AP) (*)
Bateman, W. G. (1914) A child’s progress in speech with detailed vocabularies. J. educ. Psychol5, 307-320. (E) (BG) (FQ) (V)
Bateman, W. G. (1915) Two children’s progress in speech. J. educ. Psychol., 6, 475-493. (E) (BG) (FQ) (V)
Bateman, W. G. (1916) The language status of three children at the same ages. Pedag. Seminary, 23, 211-240. (E) BG) (FQ) (V)
Bateman, W. G. (1917) Papers on language development: 1. The first word. Pedag. Seminary, 24, 391-398. (E) (G) (BI) (FW) (RL) (B) (F) (P) (V)
Battachi, M. W., & Montanini Manfredi, M. (1965) Strutture sintattiche e modelli de ordinamento seriale. Rev. psicol. soc., 12, 193-205. (I) (X) (SY)
Battin, R. R. (1962) Two methods of presenting information on speech and language development. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 17-22. (ME) (*)
Baudouin de Courtenay, J. (1870) Einige Beobachtungen an Kindern. Beitr. vergleich. Sprachforsch., 6, 215-220. (TH)
Bayley, N. (1933) Mental growth during the first three years. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 14, No. 1.(*)
Bean, C. H. (1932) An unusual opportunity to investigate the psychology of language. J. genet. Psychol, 40, 181-202. (E) (BL) (CR) (M) (PH) (SY) (V) (*)
Beasley, J. (1956a) Relationship of parental attitudes to development of speech problems. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 317-321. (LP) (ME) (TH)
Beasley, J. (1956b) Slow to talk: A guide for teachers and parents of children with delayed language development. New York, Bur. Publicat., Teach. Coll., Columbia Univer. (SD) (*)
Beckey, R. E. (1942) A study of certain factors related to retardation of speech. J. speech Disord., 7, 223-249. (SD) (*)
Belinfante-Ahn, L. (n.d.) Een antwoord op een vraag betrefende de ontwikkeling der kindertaal. School en Leven, 16, 257- , 273- . (DU) (AC) (FW) (IM)
Bellugi, U. (1965) The development of interrogative structures in children’s speech. In The development of language functions, ed. by K. F. Riegel, 103-137. Univer. Mich. Cent. for Human Growth & Develpm., Rept. No. 8. (E) (BG) (M) (NG) (PS-V) (Q) (SY)
Bellugi, U. (1967) The acquisition of negation. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Harvard Univer. (E) (BG) (GC) (M) (NG) (PA) (PA-V) (Q) (SY)
Benton, A. L. (1966) Language disorders in children. Canad. Psychologist (Inst. suppl.), 7(4), 298-312. (A) (LP) (*)
Bereiter, C. (1961) Fluency abilities in preschool children. J. genet. Psychol., 98, 47-53. (TH) (*)
Berger, L. H. M. (1928) De ontwikkeling van de logisch-grammatische functies tusschen het twaalfde en het achttiende levensjaar. Utrecht. (DU) (X) (PS-AD) (GC-C) (SY)
Bergmann, K. (1919) Beiträge zur Untersuchung der sprachlichen Entwicklung des Kindes. Z. pädag. Psychol20, 183-188, 238-244. (G) (BG) (M) (PH) (SY) (V) (*)
Berko, J. (1958) The child’s learning of English morphology. Word, 14, 150-177. [Also in: (1961) Psycholinguistics: A book of readings, ed. by S. Saporta, 359-375. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (X) (GC-N) (GC-T) (M) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-V)
Bernstein, B. (1958) Some sociological determinants of perception. Brit. J. Sociol, 9, 159-174. (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1959) A public language: Some sociological implications of a linguistic form. Brit. J. Sociol., 10, 311-326. (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1960a) Language and social class. [Research note.] Brit. J. Sociol, 11, 271-276. (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1960b) Sozio-kulturelie Determinanten des Lernens: Mit besonderer Berücksichtigung der Rolle der Sprache. In Soziologie der Schule. Köllner Ztschr. Soziol. u. Sozialpsychol., Sonderheft, 4, 52-79. (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1961a) Aspects of language and learning in the genesis of social process. J. Child Psychol Psychiat., 1, 313-324. [Also in: (1964) Language in culture and society: A reader in linguistics and anthropology, ed. by D. Hymes, 251-263. New York, Harper & Row.] (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1961b) Social class and linguistic development: A theory of social learning. In Economy, education and society, ed. by A. H. Halsey, J. Floud, & A. Anderson, 288-313. New York, Harcourt, Brace & World. (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1962a) Social class, linguistic codes and grammatical elements. Lang. & Speech, 5, 221-240. (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1962b) Social structure, language, and learning. Educ. Res., 3, 163-178. [Also in: (1967) The psychology of language, thought, and instruction: Readings, ed. by J. de Cecco, 89-103. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (SO)
Bernstein, B. (1964) Elaborated and restricted codes: Their origins and some consequences. In The ethnography of communication, ed. by J. J. Gumperz & D. Hymes, 55-69. Amer. Anthropologist, 66(6), Part 2. [Also in: (1966) Communication and culture, ed. by A. G. Smith, 427-441. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (DI) (SO) (TH)
Bernstein, B. (1965) A socio-linguistic approach to social learning. In Penguin survey of the social sciences, ed. by J. Gould. London, Penguin. (SO)
Berry, M. F. (1938) The developmental history of stuttering children. J. Pediatr, 12, 209-217. (ST) (*)
Berth, O. (1912) Mijn kleine Helga. Amsterdam. [Translation from Germ.] (G) (BG) (*)
Bever, T. G., Fodor, J. A., & Weksel, W. (1965a) On the acquisition of syntax: A critique of “contextual generalization.” Psychol. Rev., 72, 467-482. [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 257-273. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Bever, T. G., Fodor, J. A., & Weksel, W. (1965b) Is linguistics empirical? Psychol. Rev., 72, 493-500. [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 285-293. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Beyer, T. P. (1915) The vocabulary of two years. Educ. Rev., 49, 191-203. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Beyer, T. P. (1916) The vocabulary of three years. Educ. Rev., 52, 487-489. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Binet, A. (1902) Le vocabulaire et l’idéation. Rev. Phil., 54, 359-366. (F) (V) (*)
Blackman, R. S. & Battin, R. R. (1957) Case study of delayed language. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 381-384. (E) (BG) (SD)
Blagoveshchenskiy, V. (1886) Detskaya Rech’. Russ. filol. vestnik, 16. (R) (BG) (*)
Blanchard, I. (1964) Speech pattern and etiology in mental retardation. Amer. J. ment. Def., 68, 612-617. (E) (MR) (PH) (*)
Blanton, M. G. (1917) The behavior of the human infant during the first thirty days of life. Psychol. Rev., 24, 456-483. (E) (CR) (*)
Blanton, M. G., & Stinchfield, S. M. (1926) Articulation test A. Chicago, Stoelting. (E) (PH) (*)
Blatz, W. E., Fletcher, M. I., & Mason, M. (1937) Early development in the spoken language of the Dionne quintuplets. In Collected studies on the Dionne quintuplets, ed. by W. E. Blatz et al. Univer. Toronto Stud., Child Develpm. Ser., No. 16 (F) (BG) (TW) (*)
Bloch, O. (1913) Notes sur le langage d’un enfant. Mémoires Soc. Ling. Paris, 18, 37-59. (F) (BG) (HO) (M) (PH)
Bloch, O. (1921) Les premiers stades du langage de l’enfant J. Psychol. pers. pathol., 18, 693-712. (F) (BG) (HO) (M)
Bloch, O. (1923) Langage d’action dans les premiers stades du langage de l’enfant. J. Psychol, pers. pathol., 20, 670-672. (F) (TH) (*)
Bloch, O. (1924) La phrase dans le langage de l’enfant. J. Psychol. pers. pathol, 21, 18-43. (F) (BG) (M) (SY)
Bloodstein, O. (1960a) The development of stuttering: 1. Changes in nine basic features. J. speech hear. Disord.,25, 219-237. (E) (ST) (X)
Bloodstein, O. (1960b) The development of stuttering: 2. Developmental phases. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 366-376. (E) (ST)
Bloodstein, O. (1961a) Clinical forum: Stuttering in families of adopted stutterers. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 395-396. (ST)
Bloodstein, O. (1961b) The development of stuttering: 3. Theoretical and clinical implications. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 67-81. (ST) (TH)
Bloom, L. M. (1967) A comment on Lee’s “Developmental sentence types: A method for comparing normal and deviant syntactic development.”, J. speech hear. Disord., 32, 294-296. (ME) (SY)
Bluemel, C. S. (1960) Concepts of stammering: A century in review. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 24-32. (RL) (ST) (TH)
Blumberg, M. L. (1955) Respiration and speech in the cerebral palsied child. Amer. J. Dis. Child., 89, 48-53. (AP) (LP) (TH) (*)
Boer, T. J. de. (1913) Ontwikkeling van der kindertaal. Mod. kinderstud. (Zutphen), 203-229. (DU) (RL) (*)
Bogoyavlenskiy, D. N. (1957) Psikhologiya usvoyeniya orfografii. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (X) (M) (PS-N)
Bohn, W. E. (1914) First steps in verbal expression. Pedag. Seminary, 21, 578-595. (E) (BG) (SY) (TH) (V)
Bokonyi, H. (1918) Child language. [In Hungarian.] A Gyermek. (H) (V) (*)
Boksis, R. M. (1939) O razvitii slovesnoy rechi glukhonemogo rebenka.Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (D) (*)
Boksis, R. M. (1948) Osobennosti rechevogo razvitiya u detey pri narushenii slukhovogo analizatora. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 48, (R) (D) (*)
Boksis, R. M. (1953) Osobennosti rechevogo razvitiya u detey s narusheniyami slukhovogo analizatora. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 48. (R) (D) (*)
Boksis, R. M., Korovin, K. G., & Sinyak, V. A. (1955) Formirovaniye grammaticheskogo stroya yazyka u tugoukhikh uchashchikhsya. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (D) (M) (SY) (*)
Boland, J. L., Jr. (1951) Type of birth as related to stuttering. J. speech hear. Disord., 16, 40-43. (E) (ST) (*)
Bolin, I., & Bolin, M. (1916) De två första årens språkutveckling hos en svensk flicka. SvensktArk. Pedag., 4, 159-223. (SW) (BG) (*)
Bolin, I., & Bolin, M. (1920) Psykologiska och spåkliga iattagelser rörande en svensk flicka. Svenkst Ark. Pedag., 8, 49-50. (SW) (BG) (PH) (*)
Bolle, C. M. (1967) Het onderzoek van de kindertaal. Levende Talen, 649-655. (DU) (FQ) (PS) (SY)
Bonser, F. G., Burch, O. H., & Turner, M. R. (1915) Vocabulary tests as measures of school efficiency. School & Soc., 2, 714-718. (V) (*)
Borgström, C. H. (1954) Sprakanalyse som barnelek. Norsk Tidskrift for Sprogvidenskap, 17, 484-485. (N) (BG) (PH) (*)
Bossard, J. H. S. (1948) The sociology of child development. New York, Harper. (SO) (TH)
Bourneville, ., & Boyer, . (1895) Éducation de la parole chez les enfants idiots et arrières. Arch. Neurol. (F) (MR) (*)
Bovet, P. (1916) À propos de’vocabulaire. Interméd. Éducateurs, No. 34-35. (F) (V) (*)
Boyd, W. (1913) The beginnings of syntactical speech: A study in child linguistics. Child Study, 6, 21-24, 47-51. (E) (BG) (PS) (SY) (V)
Boyd, W. (1914) The development of a child’s vocabulary. Pedag. Seminary, 21, 95-124. (E) (BG) (PS) (V)
Boyd, W. (1926-27) The development of sentence structure in childhood. Brit. J. Psychol., Gen. Sect., 17, 181-191. (E) (BG) (PS) (SY)
Braine, M. D. S. (1963a) On learning the grammatical order of words. Psychol Rev., 70, 323-348. [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 232-256. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Braine, M. D. S. (1963b) The ontogeny of English phrase structure: The first phase. Language, 39, 1-13. [Also in: (1965) Readings in the psychology of cognition, ed. by R. D. Anderson, & D. P. Ausubel, 303-320. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (BG) (FW) (M) (PS) (SY) (X)
Braine, M. D. S. (1965a) On the basis of phrase structure: A reply to Bever, Fodor, and Weksel. Psychol. Rev., 72, 483-492. [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 274-284. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Braine, M. D. S. (1965b) Inferring a grammar from responses: Discussion of Gough and Segal’s comment. Psychonomic Sci., 3, 241-242. (SY) (TH)
Braine, M. D. S. (1965c) The insufficiency of a finite state model for verbal reconstructive memory. Psychonomic Sci., 2, 291-292. (SY) (TH)
Braine, M. D. S. (1966) Learning the positions of words relative to a marker element. J. exp Psychol., 72, 532-540. (SY) (TH) (X)
Brandenburg, G. C. (1915) The language of a three-year-old child. Pedag: Seminary, 22, 89-120. (E) (BG) (V)
Brandenburg, G. C. (1918) Psychological aspects of language. J. educ. Psychol., 9, 313-332. (E) (V) (*)
Brandenburg, G. C., & Brandenburg, J. (1916) Language development during the fourth year: The vocabulary. Pedag. Seminary, 23, 14-29. (E) (FQ) (V)
Brandenburg, G. C. & Brandenburg, J. (1919) Language development during the fourth year: The conversation. Pedag. Seminary, 26, 27-40. (E) (FQ) (V)
Brannon, J. B., Jr., & Murry, T. (1966) The spoken syntax of normal, hard-of-hearing, and deaf children. J. speech hear. Res., 9, 604-610. (E) (X) (D) (SY)
Braun-Lamesch, M. M. (1962) Le rôle du contexte dans la compréhension du langage chez l’enfant. Psychol, franç., 7, 180-189. (F) (X) (SC) (SS) (SY)
Braun-Lamesch, M. M. (1964) Contexte et catégories grammaticales: Étude génétique chez les enfants de 8 a 13 ans. Psychol, franç., 9, 118-127. (F) (X) (PS-A) (PS-AV) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SY)
Braun-Lamesch, M. M. (1965) Les contextes des noms et des verbes chez l’enfant. J. Psychol, norm, pathol, 62, 201-218. (F) (PS-N) (PS-V) (X)
Braun-Lamesch, M. M. (1967) Remarques sur le caractère global ou analytique de la compréhension du langage chez l’enfant. J. Psychol, norm, pathol, 64, 73-83. (F) (IM) (SY) (TH) (X)
Breiland, D. M. (1950) A comparative study of the speech of blinded and sighted children. Speech Monogr., 17, 98-103. (E) (BL) (X) (*)
Brenstiern Pfanhauser, S. (1930) Rozwój mowy dziecka. Prace filol, 15. (P) (BG) (BI) (M) (PH) (PS) (SY)
Bricker, W. A. (1967) Errors in the echoic behavior of preschool children. J. speech hear. Res., 10, 67-76. (E) (PD) (PH) (X) (*)
Brigance, W. N. (1934) The language learning of a child. J. appl. Psychol, 18, 143-154. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Brimer, M. A., & Dunn, L. M. (1962) The English picture vocabulary tests. (ME) (V)
Brodbeck, A. J., & Irwin, O. C. (1946) The speech behavior of infants without families. Child Develpm., 17, 145-156. (CR) (SO) (*)
Brodnitz, F. S. (1951) Stuttering of different types in identical twins. J. speech hear. Disord., 16, 334-339. (E) (BG) (ST) (TW)
Brooks, F. D. (1926) The vocabularies of children, ages one to eight or nine. Baltimore Bull. Educ., 4, 153-155. (E) (V) (*)
Brown, R. (1957) Linguistic determinism and the part of speech. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol55, 1-5. [Also in: (1961) Psycholinguistics: A book of readings, ed. by S. Saporta, 503-509. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (X) (GC-N) (GC-T) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SC) (M) (SY) (TH)
Brown, R. (1958) How shall a thing be called? Psychol. Rev., 65, 14-21. [Also in: (1964) The cognitive processes: Readings, ed. by R. J. C. Harper, C. C. Anderson, et al., 647-654. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (PA) (SS) (TH)
Brown, R. (1965) Social psychology. New York, Free Press. (E) (BG) (X) (GC) (IM) (M) (PA) (PH) (PS) (SC) (SY) (TH)
Brown, R., & Bellugi, U. (1964) Three processes in the child’s acquisition of syntax. Harvard educ. Rev., 34, 133-151. [Also in: (1964) New directions in the study of language, ed. by E. H. Lenneberg, 131-162. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press.] [Also in: (1966) Language and learning, ed. by J. A. Emig, J. T. Fleming, & H. M. Popp, 3-23. New York, Harcourt, Brace & World.] (E) (BG) (IM) (M) (PA) (PS) (SY)
Brown, R. W., & Berko, J. (1960a) Psycholinguistic research methods. In Handbook of research methods in child development, ed. by P. H. Mussen, 516-560. New York, Wiley. (BI) (GC) (M) (ME) (PS) (RL) (SY)
Brown, R. W., & Berko, J. (1960b) Word association and the acquisition of grammar. Child Develpm., 31, 1-14. [Also in: (1963) Research readings in child psychology, ed. by D. S. Palermo & L. P. Lipsitt, 351-362. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] [Also in: (1967) The psychology of language, thought, and instruction: Readings, ed. by J. de Cecco, 295-305. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 294-304. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (E) (X) (PS) (SY) (M)
Brown, R., & Fraser, C. (1963) The acquisition of syntax. In Verbal behavior and learning: Problems and processes, ed. by C. N. Cofer & B. S. Musgrave, 158-197. New York, McGraw-Hill. [Also in: (1964) The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. W. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 43-79.] (E) (BG) (GC) (IM) (M) (PS) (SY) (ME)
Brown, R., Fraser, C., & Bellugi, U. (1964) Explorations in grammar evaluation. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 79-91. (E) (ME) (SY)
Bruce, D. J. (1964) The analysis of word sounds by young children. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 34, 58-170. (E) (AC) (FQ) (PH) (X)
Bruce, D. J. (1965) Language and cognition: Studies of the verbal behavior of children. Acta Psychol 24, 583-586. (X) (TH) (*)
Bruce, D. J., & Pugh, H. M. (1966) Immediate verbal memory and linguistic sophistication in a group of six-year-old children. Lang. & Speech,, 9, 69-83. (E) (X) (SP)
Bruner, J. S., & Olver, R. R. (1963) Development of equivalence transformations in children. In Basic cognitive processes in children, ed. by J. Wright & J. Kagan, 125-141. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 28(2). [Also in: (1965) Readings in the psychology of cognition, ed. by R. C. Anderson & D. P. Ausubel, 415-434. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (X) (SS)
Bruner, J. S., Olver, R. R., Greenfield, P. M., et al. (1966) Studies in cognitive growth. New York, Wiley. (AF) (E) (S) (W) (X) (SS) (TH)
Brunner, H., & Stengel, E. (1932) Zur Lehre von den Aphasien im Kindesalter. Z. Neur. Psychiat., 142, 430-450. (A) (AP) (*)
Bryan, F. E. (1953) How large are children’s vocabularies? Elem. Sch. J., 54, 210-216. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Buckingham, B. R., & Dolch, E. W. (1936) A combined word list. Boston, Ginn. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Buckman, S. S. (1897) The speech of children. Nineteenth Century, 61, 792-807. (TH) (*)
Buffon, G. L. L. Comte de (1749-1788) Histoire naturelle et particuliere. 36 vols. (PH) (TH) (*)
Bühler, C. (1928) Kindheit und Jugend: Genese des Bewusstseins. Leipzig, Hirzel. [3rd ed. 1931.] (G) (TH) (*)
Bühler, C. (1935) From birth to maturity: An outline of the psychological development of the child. London, Kegan Paul, Trench, & Trubner. (G) (TH) (*)
Bühler, C., & Hetzer, H. (1928) Das erste Verständnis für Ausdruck im ersten Lebensjahr. Z. Psychol 107. (G) (SC)
Bühler, K. (1918) Die geistige Entwicklung des Kindes. Jena, Fischer. [6th ed. 1930.] (TH) (*)
Bühler, K. (1922) Vom Wesen der Syntax. Idealistische Neuphilologie; Festschrift Karl Vossler, 54-84. (SY) (TH) (*)
Bühler, K. (1926) Les lois générales d’évolution dans le langage de l’enfant. J. Psychol., 23, 597-607. (TH)
Bulakhovskiy, L. A. (1928) Dityacha mova. In Osnovi movoznavstva. Khar’kov. (U) (*)
Bullowa, M., Jones, L. G., & Bever, T. G. (1964) The development from vocal to verbal behavior in children. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 101-107. (CR) (ME) (PA) (PH)
Bullowa, M., Jones, L. G., & Duckert, A. R. (1964) The acquistion of a word. Lang. & Speech, 7, 107-111. (E) (BG) (IM) (PA) (PH) (V)
Burdach, K. F. (1836) Der Mensch nach den verschiedenen Seiten seiner Natur. (TH) (*)
Burdach, K. F. (1847) Anthropologie für das gebildete Publikum. [Rev. ed. by E. Burdach.] (TH) (*)
Burgi, E. J., & Matthews, J. (1958) Predicting intelligibility of cerebral palsied speech. J. speech hear. Res., 1, 331-343. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X) (*)
Burkhard, P. (1898) Die Fehler der Kinder. Karlsruhe. (*)
Burkland, M. (1967) The ability of deaf and hearing children to apply morphological rules. J. speech hear. Res., 10, 77-86. (E) (D) (M) (X) (*)
Burling, R. (1959) Language development of a Garo and English speaking child. Word, 15, 45-68. (E) (GA) (BG) (GC) (M) (ML) (PH) (PS) (SY)
Burlingame, D. (1961) Some notes on the development of the blind. The psychoanalytic study of the child, 26, 121-145. (BL) (*)
Burroughs, G. E. R. (1957) A study of the vocabulary of young children. Oliver & Boyd. (E) (V) (*)
Burtt, H. E. (1932) An experimental study of early childhood memory. J. genet. Psychol., 40, 287-295. (SP)
Burtt, H. E. (1937) A futher study of early childhood memory. J. genet. Psychol., 50, 187-192. (SP)
Buschmann, J. C. E. (1852) Über den Naturlaut. Abh. Akad. Wiss. Berlin. [Sep. ed. 1853.] (PH) (TH) (*)
Busemann, A. (1925) Die Sprache der Jugend als Ausdruck der Entwicklungsrhythmik; Sprachstatistische Untersuchungen. Jena, Fischer. (G) (FQ) (PS)
Bush, A. D. (1914) The vocabulary of a three-year-old girl. Pedag. Seminary, 21, 125-142. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Byrne, M. C. (1959) Speech and language development of athetoid and spastic children. J. speech hear. Disord., 24, 231-240. (E) (AP) (PH) (X)
Byrne, M. C., Shelton, R. L., Jr., & Diedrich, W. M. (1961) Articulatory skill, physical management, and classification of children with cleft palates. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 326-333. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X)
C
Čáda, F. (1960) Studium řeči dětské: 1. Prague. (CZ) (TH)
Čáda, F. (1908) Studium řeči dětské: 2. Prague. (CZ) (TH)
Callard, J. A. (1933) Bilingualism and the preschool child. Proc. World Federat. educ. Assoc., 56-58. Dublin. (ML) (*)
Campbell, C. V. (1901) Two recent studies of children’s vocabularies. Child Study Monthly, 6, 277-280. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Carlton, L. E. (1947) Anomalous preterite and past participle forms in the oral language of average fourth grade children. Amer. Speech, 22, No. 1, Part 1, 40-45. (E) (FQ) (GC-T) (*)
Carmichael, L. (1964) The early growth of language capacity in the individual. In New directions in the study of language, ed. by E. H. Lenneberg. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (AP) (CR) (TH)
Carnoy, A. (1934) Reduplicatie in de kindertaal. Verslagen en Meddeelingen der Koninklijke Vlaamsche Acad. voor Taalen Letterkunde, 317-323. Ghent. (RR)
Carr, J. (1953) An investigation of the spontaneous speech sounds of five-year-old deaf-born children. J. speech hear. Disord., 18, 22-29. (E) (D) (FQ) (PH) (X) (CR)
Carroll, J. B. (1939) Determining and numerating adjectives in children’s speech. Child Develpm., 10, 215-229. (E) (FQ) (PS-A)
Carroll, J. B. (1953) The study of language: A survey of linguistics and related disciplines in America. Cambridge, Harvard Univer. Press. (BI) (RL)
Carroll, J. B. (1960) Language development in children. In Encycl. educ. Res., 744-752. New York, Macmillan. [Also in: (1961) Psycho linguistics: A book of readings, ed. by S. Saporta, 331-345. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (BI) (RL)
Carroll, J. B. (1964) Words, meanings and concepts. Harvard educ. Rev., 34, 178-202. (SS) (TH)
Carroll, J. B., & Casagrande, J. B. (1958) The function of language classification in behavior. In Readings in social psychology, ed. by E. E. Maccoby, T. M. Newcomb, & E. H. Hartley. New York, Holt, Rinehart, & Winston. (AI) (E) (HP) (NA) (PS-V) (SO) (SS) (X)
Carrow, Sister M. A. (1957) Linguistic functioning of bilingual and monolingual children. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 371-380. (E) (S) (ML) (PD) (SC) (V) (X)
Carson, A. S., & Rabin, A. I. (1960) Verbal comprehension and communication in Negro and white children. J. educ. Psychol., 51, 47-51. (E) (DI) (SO) (V) (*)
Casagrande, J. B. (1948) Comanche baby language. Internatl J. Amer. Ling., 14, 11-14. [Also in: (1964) Language in culture and society : A reader in linguistics and anthropology, ed. by D. Hymes, 245-250. New York, Harper & Row.] (AI) (CO) (PA)
Cassirer, E. (1923) Philosophie der symbolischen Formen: Part 1. Die Sprache. Berlin, B. Cassirer. (TH)
Cassirer, E. (1933) Le langage et la construction du monde des objets. J. Psychol., 30, 18-44. (TH)
Cassirer, E. (1944) An essay on man: An introduction to a philosophy of human culture. New Haven, Conn., Yale Univer. Press. (RL) (TH)
Casteneda, A., Fahel, L. S., & Odom, R. (1961) Associative characteristics of sixty-three adjectives and their relation to verbal paired-associate learning in children. Child Develpm., 32, 297-304. (E) (PS-A) (V) (X) (FQ)
Cazden, C. B. (1965) Environmental assistance to the child’s acquisition of grammar. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Harvard Univer. Cambridge, Mass. (E) (M) (PA) (SO) (SY) (TH) (X)
Cazden, C. B. (1966) Subcultural differences in child language: An inter-disciplinary review. Merrill-Palmer Quart. Behav. & Develpm., 12, 185-219. (BI) (RL) (SO) (SY) (V) (E) (X)
Cazden, C. B. (1967) On individual differences in language competence and performance. J. spec. Educ., 1, 135-150. (E) (BG) (M) (PS-N) (Q) (SY) (X)
Chadwick, M. (1928) The child’s early discrimination between sound and speech. Psyche, No. 32, 58-72. [Ger. transl.: (1928) Die Unterscheidung zwischen Ton und Sprache in der frühen Kindheit. Z. Psychoanalyt. Pädag., 2, 369-383.] (RS)
Chamberlain, A. F. (1890) Notes on Indian child-language. Amer. Anthropologist, 3, 237-241. (AI) (AL) (IR) (PA) (*)
Chamberlain, A. F. (1893) Notes on Indian child-language. Amer. Anthropologist, 6, 321- . (AI) (AL) (IR) (PA) (*)
Chamberlain, A. F. (1896) The child and childhood in folk-thought (The child in primitive culture). New York, Mason. (BI) (TH) (*)
Chamberlain, A. F. (1900) The child, a study in the evolution of man. London/New York. (BI) (TH) (*)
Chamberlain, A. F. (1906) Preterite-forms, etc., in the language of English-speaking children. Mod. Lang. Notes, 21, 42-44. (E) (BG) (GC-T) (PS-V) (*)
Chamberlain, A. F., & Chamberlain, I. C. (1904) Studies of a child. Pedag. Seminary, 11, 264-291,452-483. (E) (BG) (SS) (V)
Chamberlain, A. F.& Chamberlain, I. C. (1905) Studies of a child. Pedag. Seminary, 12, 427-453. (E) (BG) (SS) (V)
Champneys, F. H. (1881) Notes on an infant. Mind, 6, 104-107. (E) (BG) (*)
Chan, C. H., Lenneberg, E. H., & Rebelsky, F. G. (1964) Apparatus for reducing play-back time of tape recorded, intermittent vocalization. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 127-130. (ME)
Chao, Y. R. (1951) The Cantian idiolect: An analysis of the Chinese spoken by a twenty-eight-months-old child. Univer. Calif. Publ. Semitic Philol., 11, 27-44. (C)(BG) (GC) (IN) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY)
Chase, R. A., Sutton, S., & First, D. A. (1961) Developmental study of changes in behavior under delayed auditory feedback. J. genet. Psychol., 99, 101-112. (AP) (PH) (SP) (*)
Chelyuskina, Ye. I., & Saydakova, Ye. I., eds. (1959) Problema rechi kak sredstva obshcheniya v shkole glukhonemykh. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 104. (R) (D)
Chen, H. P. (1942) Speech sounds of infants: The newborn period. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Univer. Iowa. (CR) (*)
Chen, H. P. (194-) Speech development during the first year of life. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Univer. Iowa. (FQ) (V) (*)
Chen, H. P., & Irwin, O. C. (1946a) Development of speech during infancy: Curve of differential percentage indices. J. exp. Psychol., 36, 522-525. (CR) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Chen, H. P., & Irwin, O. C. (1946b) Infant speech vowel and consonant types. J. speech Disord., 11, 27-29. (CR) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Chen, H. P., & Irwin, O. C. (1946c) The type-token ratio applied to infant speech sounds. J. speech Disord., 11, 126-130. (BB) (CR) (FQ) (ME) (PH)
Chernokozov, I. I. (1962) K voprosu o strukture suzhdeniy, vyrazhennykh nazyvnymi i nekotorymi predlozheniyami (na materiale issledovaniya rannikh suzhdeniy u detey). Uch. zap. Vinnica Pedag. Inst., 20, 80-86. (R) (SY) (*)
Chipman, C. E. (1935) The vocabulary of mental defectives. Proc. Amer. Ass. Stud. ment. Def., 40, 485-503. (MR) (V) (*)
Chomsky, N. (1959) A review of Verbal behavior, by B. F. Skinner. Language, 35, 26-58. [Also in: (1964) The structure of language: Readings in the philosophy of language, ed. by J. A. Fodor & J. J. Katz, 547-578. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] [Also in: (1967) The psychology of language, thought, and instruction, ed. by J. de Cecco, 325-338. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 142-171. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Chomsky, N. (1962) Explanatory models in linguistics. In Logic, Methodology and philosophy of science, ed. by E. Nagel, P. Suppes, & A. Tarski, 528-550. Stanford, Stanford Univer. Press. (SY) (TH)
Chomsky, N. (1964a) Current issues in linguistic theory. The Hague, Mouton. [Also in: (1964) The structure of language: Readings in the philosophy of language, ed. by J. A. Fodor & J. J. Katz, 50-116. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (PH) (SY) (TH)
Chomsky, N. (1964b) Formal discussion. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 35-39. (ME) (SY) (TH)
Chomsky, N. (1965) Aspects of the theory of syntax. Cambridge, Mass., M.I.T.Press. (TH)
Chomsky, N. (1966) Cartesian linguistics. New York, Harper & Row. (RL) (TH)
Chomsky, N. (1967) The formal nature of language. Appendix to Biological foundations of language, by E. H. Lenneberg, 397-442. New York, Wiley. (TH)
Chomsky, N., & Miller, G. A. (1963) Introduction to the formal analysis of natural languages. In Handbook of mathematical psychology, Vol. 2, ed. by R. D. Luce, R. R. Bush, & E. Galanter, 269-321. New York, Wiley. (SY) (TH)
Chrisman, O. (1893) The secret language of children. Science, 22, 303. [Also in: (1896) Child Study Monthly, 2, 202-211.] [Also in: (1898) Century, 56, 54-58.] [Also in: (1898) North West Monthly, 8, 187-193, 375-379, 649-651.] (E) (IL) (*)
Chrisman, O. (1895) One year with a little girl. Educ. Rev., 9. (E) (BG) (*)
Chukovskiy, K. (1961) Ot dvukh do pyati. [15th ed.] Moscow, Detgiz. [Transl.: (1963) From two to five. Berkeley/Los Angeles, Univer. Calif. Press.] (R) (GC) (M) (MI)
Church, J. (1961) Language and the discovery of reality: A developmental psychology of cognition. New York, Random House. (RL) (TH)
Ciampi, L. (1933) La patología del lenguaje en la edad evolutiva. Bol. Inst. Psiquiat., 5, 147-163. (LP) (*)
Claparède, E. (1916) Bradylexie bei einem sonst normalen Kind. Rev. Méd. Suisse Rom., 804 (LP) (*)
Clement, M., & Twitchell, T. E. (1959) Dysarthria in cerebral palsy. J. speech hear. Disord., 24, 118-122. (E) (AP) (PH) (X)
Coetzee, J. C. (1933-34) Die taalontwikkeling van die kleinkind. Nederlandsch Tijdsch. Psychol., 1, 214-228. (SA) (BI) (FQ) (PS) (V)
Cohen, J. H., & Diehl, C. F. (1963) Relation of speech-sound discrimination ability to articulation-type speech defects. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 187-190. (E) (PD) (PH) (X)
Cohen, M. (1925) Sur les langages successifs de l’enfant. Mélanges linguistiques. . . J. Vendryes, 109-127. Paris. (F) (BG) (SS) (V)
Cohen, M. (1927) A propos de la troisième personne du féminin au pluriel en français. Bull Soc. Ling. Paris, 27, 201-208. (F) (GC-P) (PS-P) (*)
Cohen, M. (1933) Observations sur les dernières persistances du langage enfantin. J. Psychol. pers. pathol., 30, 390-399. (F) (BG) (M)
Cohen, M. (1952) Sur l’étude du langage enfantin. Enfance, 5, 181-249. (F) (BB) (BG) (CR) (FW) (*)
Cohen, M., Ed. (1962) Etudes sur le langage de l’enfant. Paris, Scarabée. (F) (*)
Collin, A. (1919) L’enfance du débile intellectuel. Ann. Med.-Psych. (MR) (*)
Colvin, C. M. (1951) A re-examination of the vocabulary question. Elem. Eng., 28, 350-356. (V) (*)
Comas, J. (1931) Contribución al estudio de la génesis psicobiológica del lenguaje hablado. Rev. Pedag., 10, 484-490. (AP) (*)
Combes, L. (1900-1905) Quelques observations sur le langage des enfants. Bull. Soc. Libre Étud. Psychol Enfant, 1-5, 452-454. (F) (BG) (*)
Compayré, G. (1893) L’évolution intellectuelle et morale de l’enfant. Paris. [3rd ed. 1910.] [Transl.: (1896-1902) The intellectual and moral development of the child. 2 vols. New York, Appleton.] [Ger. transl.: (1900) Die Entwicklung der Kindesseele. Altenburg. [2nd ed. 1924.]] [Span, transl.: (1905) La evolución intelectual y moral del niño. Madrid, Jorro.] (RL) (TH)
Conant, L. L. (1896) The number concept. New York. (GC-N) (*)
Conradi, E. (1903) Children’s interests in words, slang, stories, etc. Pedag. Seminary, 10, 359-404. (MI) (SO) (*)
Conradi, E. (1904) Psychology and pathology of speech development in the child. Pedag. Seminary, 11, 328-380. (LP) (RL) (ST) (TH)
Cooley, C. H. (1908) A study of the early use of self-words by a child. Psychol Rev., 15, 339-357. (E) (BG) (GC-P) (PS-P) (V)
Cornioley, H. (1935) Die sprachliche Entwicklung eines Kindes von ihren Anfängen bis zum dritten Lebensjahr. Bern, Lang. (G) (M) (PH) (*)
Costa, A. M., & Fonzi, A. (1967) Psicologia del linguaggio. Turin, Boringhieri. (I) (M) (PS) (SO) (X)
Court, S. R. A. (1910-20) Linguistic creativeness of a child. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 1, 70. (E) (BG) (M) (*)
Court, S. R. A. (1920) Numbers, time, and space in the first five years of a child’s life. Pedag. Seminary, 27, 71-89. (E) (BG) (GC-N) (GC-T) (*)
Court, S. R. A. (1926) Some sentences of a boy three years eight months old. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 6, 334-343. (E) (BG) (SY) (*)
Court, S. R. A. (1929) The growth of a small boy’s linguistic interest. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 7, 224-234. (E) (BG) (MI) (*)
Cousinet, R. (1907) Le rôle de l’analogie dans les représentations du monde extérieur chez les enfants. Rev. Phil., 64, 159-173. (F) (*)
Cousinet, R. (1936) Le monologue enfantin. J. Psychol, norm, pathol., 33, 28-39. (F) (*)
Cowan, P. A., Weber, J., Hoddinott, B. A., & Klein, J. (1967) Mean length of spoken response as a function of stimulus, experimenter and subject. Child Develpm., 38, 191-203. (E) (ME) (X)
Cremnitz, Mlle. (1915) Deux jumelles. Bull. Soc. Libre Étud. Psychol. Enfant, 107. (F) (TW) (*)
Cromwell, A. D. (1900) The language of the child and the race. Child Study-Monthly, 6, 69-71. (E) (BG) (TH) (*)
Crookes, T. G., & Greene, M. C. L. (1963) Some characteristics of children with two types of speech disorder. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 33, 31-40. (E) (PD) (*)
Cross, E. (1950) Some features of the phonology of a four-year-old boy. Word, 6,137-140. (E) (BG) (PH) (*)
Cuff, N. B. (1930) Vocabulary tests. J. educ. Psychol., 21, 212-220. (V) (*)
Cuff, N. B. (1935) Social status and vocabulary. J. genet. Psychol., 46, 226-229. (E) (SO) (V) (*)
Cummings, F. S. (1940) When do babies learn to talk? Parents’ Magazine, 15, 45. (BU) (E) (ML) (*)
Cunningham, M. A., & Dixon, C. (1961) A study of the language of an autistic child. J. Child Psychol. Psychiat., 2, 193-202. (E) (BG) (MR) (*)
Curti, M. W. (1930) Child psychology. New York, Longmans Green. [2nd ed. 1938.] (E) (BG) (PH) (*)
Curtis, J. F., & Hardy, J. C. (1959) A phonetic study of misarticulation of /r/. J. speech hear. Res., 2, 244-257. (E) (PD) (PH) (*)
D
Dale, E. (1931a) A comparison of two word lists. Educ. Res. Bull., 10, 484-489. (E) (V) (*)
Dale, E. (1931b) Difficulties in vocabulary research. Educ. Res. Bull., 10, 119-122. (E) (ME) (V) (*)
Dale, E. (1956) The problem of vocabulary in reading. Educ. Res. Bull., 25, 113-123. (V) (*)
Dale, E., & Reichert, D. (1957) Bibliography of vocabulary studies. Bur. Educ. Res., Ohio State Univer. [2nd rev. ed.] (E) (BI) (V)
Daniel, . (1898) Quelques défauts de prononciation. La Policlinique. Brussels. (F) (PD) (*)
Darley, F. L., & Moll, K. L. (1960) Reliability of language measures and size of language sample. J. speech hear. Res., 3, 166-173. (E) (ME) (*)
Darley, F. L., & Winitz, H. (1961) Age of first word: Review of research. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 272-290. (FW) (RL)
Darwin, C. (1872) The expression of emotions in man and animals. London, Murray. (CR) (TH)
Darwin, C. (1877) A biographical sketch of an infant. Mind, 2, 285-294. [Ger. transl.: (1877) Kosmos, 1.] (E) (BG)
Davis, D. M. (1939) The relation of repetitions in the speech of young children to certain measures of language maturity and situational factors, Part 1. J. speech Disord., 4, 303-318. (RR) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1932) The form and function of children’s questions. Child Develpm., 3, 57-74. (E) (Q) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1937a) The development of linguistic skill in twins, singletons with siblings, and only children from age five to ten years. Univer. Minn., Inst. Child Welfare, Monogr. Ser., 14. (E) (RL) (SD) (TW) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1937b) Development in the use of proper names. Child Develpm., 8, 270-272. (E) (PS-N) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1937c) Mean sentence length compared with long and short sentences as a reliable measure of language development. Child Develpm., 8, 69-79. (ME) (SY) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1937d) The mental and linguistic superiority of only girls. Child Develpm., 8, 139-143. (SO) (SX) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1938a) Basic English in the speech of American children. School & Soc., 48, 665-668. (E) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1938b) Developmental changes in the distribution of parts of speech. Child Develpm., 9, 309-317. (E) (FQ) (PS) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1939) Accuracy versus error as a criterion in children’s speech. J. educ. Psychol., 30, 365-371. (ME) (TH) (*)
Davis, E. A. (1941) The location of the subordinate clause in oral and written language. Child Develpm., 12, 333-338. (E) (SY) (*)
Davis, F. B. (1944) The interpretation of frequency ratings obtained from “The teacher’s word book.” J. educ. Psychol., 35, 169-174. (FQ) (V) (*)
Dawe, H. C. (1942) A study of the effect of an educational program upon language development and related mental functions in young children. J. exp. Educ., 11, 200-209. (E) (X) (SO) (V) (*)
Day, E. J. (1932) The development of language in twins: 1. A comparison of twins and single children. 2. The development of twins: Their resemblances and differences. Child Develpm., 3, 179-199, 298-316. (SD) (TW) (*)
Dearborn, G. V. N. (1910) Motor-sensory development: Observations on the first three years of childhood. Baltimore, Warwick & York. (AP) (BG) (*)
De Boer, J. J. (1952) Some sociological factors in language development. Elem. Eng., 29, 482-492. (E) (ML) (RL) (SO) (*)
Debrunner, A. (1919) Aus der Sprache eines Kindes. Festgabe Adolf Kaegi, 1-11. Frauenfeld. (G) (BG) (ML) (*)
De Camp, L. S. (1946) Learning to talk. Amer. Speech, 21, 23-28. (E) (BG) (PH) (*)
Decroly, O. (1929) Un cas d’alexie et d’agraphie congénitale chez un débile mental. J. Neurol. Psychol, 346. (A) (MR) (*)
Decroly, O. (1930) Le développement du langage parlé chez l’enfant. Liège, Édition Biblio. (F) (BG) (*)
Decroly, O. (1934) Comment l’enfant arrive à parler. Cahiers de la Centrale (Centrale du P. E. S. de Belgique), 8, 1-306. (F) (IM) (SC) (*)
Decroly, O. (19—) L’exploration du langage de l’enfant: Épreuves de compréhension d’imitation et d’expression. Uccle. (F) (IM) (SC) (*)
Deeg, E. (1938) Das symbolische Denken in der Kindersprache. Würzburg, Trütsch. (SS) (*)
Deese, J. (1964) Comments and conclusions. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 177-181. (SY) (TH)
Degand, J. (1910) Observations sur un enfant sourd. Arch. Psychol, 10, 378-389. (F) (D) (*)
De Hirsch, K. (1967) Differential diagnosis between aphasie and schizophrenic language in children. J. speech hear. Disord., 32, 3-10. (A) (LP) (PP) (*)
De Hirsch, K., & Jansky, J. J. (1956) Language investigation of children suffering from familial dysantonomia. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 450-460. (E) (AP) (LP) (PD) (PH)
De Hirsch, K., Jansky, J. J., & Langford, W. S. (1964a) The oral language performance of premature children and controls. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 60-69. (E) (AP) (PH) (SC) (SD) (V) (X) (FQ) (GC) (IM) (M) (SY)
De Hirsch, K., Jansky, J., & Langford, W. S. (1964b) Oral language performance of two groups of immature children. Folia Phoniatrica, 16, 109-122. (E) (AP) (FQ) (GC) (IM) (M) (PH) (PS) (SC) (SY) (X)
Delacroix, H. (1924a) L’activité linguistique de l’enfant. J. Psychol, 21, 4-17. (F) (M) (*)
Delacroix, H. (1924b) Le développement du langage chez l’individu. In Traité de psychologie, ed. by G. Dumas, Vol. 2, 166-173. Paris (RL) (*)
Delacroix, H. (1924c) Le langage et la pensée. Paris, Alcan. [2nd ed. 1930.] (RL) (*)
Delacroix, H. (1926) L’analyse psychologique de la fonction linguistique. Oxford, Clarendon Press. (RL) (*)
Delacroix, H. (1934) L ’enfant et le langage. Paris, Alcan. (RL) (*)
Della Valle, G. (1931) Le prime fasi dello sviluppo del linguaggio infantile. Riv. Pedag., 24, 1-35. (I) (BG) (*)
Dennis, W. (1940) The Hopi child. New York, Appleton-Century. (AI) (HP) (*)
Descoeudres, A. (1924) La mesure du langage de l’enfant. J. Psychol., 21, 44.47. (F) (V) (*)
Descoeudres, A. (19—) Le développement de l’enfant de deux à sept ans. Neuchatel/Paris, Delachaux & Niestle. (F) (V) (*)
Deussing, H. (1927) Der sprachliche Ausdruck des Schulkindes. Langensalza, Beltz. (G) (*)
Deutsch, M. (1965a) The disadvantaged child and the learning process. In Education in depressed areas, ed. by A. H. Passow, 163-179. New York, Columbia Univer. Press. (E) (DI) (SO) (SY) (*)
Deutsch, M (1965b) The role of social class in language development and cognition. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 25, 78-88. (E) (DI) (SO) (SS) (TH) (V)
Deville, G. (1890) Notes sur le développement du langage. Rev. Ling. Philol. Comp., 23, 330-343. (F) (BG) (*)
Deville, G. (1891) Notes sur le développement du langage. Rev. Ling. Philol. Comp., 24, 10-42, 128-143, 242-257, 300-320. (F) (BG) (PH) (V) (*)
De Vooys. See Vooys.
Dewey, E. (1935) Behavior development in infants; A survey of the literature on prenatal and postnatal activity 1920-1934. New York, Columbia Univer. Press. (CR) (RL) (*)
Dewey, J. (1894) The psychology of infant language. Psychol. Rev., 1, 63-66. (E) (BG) (PS) (TH)
Diamantaras, A. (1905) La langue des enfants de Kastellorizo (Turquie d’Asie). Mém. Soc. Ling. Paris, 13, 67-70. (GR) (FW) (*)
Dickson, S. (1962) Differences between children who spontaneously outgrow and children who retain functional articulation errors. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 263-271. (E) (PD) (PH) (*)
Diedrich, W. M., & Poser, C. M. (1960) Language and mentation of two phenylketonuria children. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 124-134. (E) (AP) (BG) (MR) (SD)
Dieffenbacher, (1902) Zur Psychologie der Kindersprache. Die Woche, Heft 37, 1736. (TH) (*)
Diehl, C. F., Ed. (1958) A compendium of research and theory on stuttering. Springfield, Ill., Charles T. Thomas. (AP) (ST) (TH) (*)
Dillenius, W. J. (1790) Fragmente eines Tagebuches über die Entwicklung der körperlichen und geistigen Fähigkeiten und Anlagen eines Kindes. Braunschweig. J., 1, 279. (G) (BG) (*)
Di Vesta, F. J. (1964a) The distribution of modifiers used by children in a word-association task. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 3, 421-427. (E) (X) (FQ) (PS-A)
Di Vesta, F. J. (1964b) A Simplex analysis of changes with age in responses to a restricted word-association task. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 3, 505-510. (E) (X) (FQ) (PS-A)
Di Vesta, F. J. (1965) Developmental patterns in the use of modifiers as modes of conceptualization. Child Develpm., 36, 185-213. (E) (FQ) (PS-A) (PS-N) (SS) (X)
Di Vesta, F. J. (1966) A normative study of 220 concepts rated on the semantic differential by children in grades 2 through 7. J. genet. Psychol., 109, 205-229. (E) (SS) (X)
Dix, K. W. (1912) Körperliche und geistige Entwicklung eines Kindes. Leipzig. (G) (BG) (*)
Dix, K. W. (1939) Das Seelenleben des Kindes im ersten Lebensjahr. Jena, Fischer. (G) (BG) (*)
Dokecki, P. R. (1966) Verbalism and the blind: A critical review of the concept and the literature. Except. Child., 32, 525-530. (BL) (RL) (TH) (*)
Dolch, E. W. (1936) How much word knowledge do children bring to grade 1? 1 Elem. Eng. Rev., 13, 177-183. (V) (*)
Doran, E. W. (1907) A study of vocabularies. Pedag. Seminary, 14, 401-438. (RL) (V) (*)
Drapkina, S. Ye. (1946) Smyslovaya dinamika vnutrenney rechi i yeye vyrazheniye v ustnoy i pis’mennoy rechi shkol’nikov. Uch. Zap. Leningr. Gos. Pedag. Inst. im. Gertzena, 53. (R) (SS) (SY) (*)
Drever, J. (1915-16) A study of children’s vocabularies, 1-3. J. exp. Pedag., 3, 34-43, 96-103, 182-188. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Drever, J. (1919) The vocabulary of a free kindergarten child. J. exp. Pedag., 5, 28-37, (E) (V) (*)
Drummond, M. (1916) Notes on speech development, 1-2. Child Study, 9, 83-86, 95-99. (E) (BG) (*)
Drummond, M. (1925) Five years old or thereabouts. London, Arnold. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Dumas, G. (1933) Nouveau traité de psychologie. Paris. (CR) (IM) (IN) (*)
Durand, M. (1949) De quelques éliminations d’homonymes chez un enfant. J. Psychol. norm, pathol., 42, 53-63. (F) (HO)
Durand, M. (1952-53) Le langage enfantin. Conf. Inst. Ling. Univer. Paris, 11, 83-98. (M) (PH) (RL) (TH)
Durand, M. (1960) Quelques souvenirs de compréhension enfantine du langage. J. Psychol, norm, pathol, 57, 253-256. (F) (SC)
Dyroff, A. (1904) Über das Seelenleben des Kindes. Bonn. [2nd ed. 1911.] (G) (BG) (*)
E
Eber, H. (1896) Zur Kritik der Kinderpsychologie, mit Rücksicht auf neuere Arbeiten. Phil. Stud., 12, 587-628. (TH) (*)
Eckerson, L. D. (1938) Estimation of individual differences in the total size of general English recognition vocabulary. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Univer. S. Calif. (E) (V) (*)
Egger, E. (1870) Observations et réflexions sur le développement de l’intelligence et du langage chez les enfants. Paris, Picard. [5th ed. 1887.] [Ger. transl.: (1903) Beobachtungen und Betrachtungen über die Entwicklung der Intelligenz und der Sprache bei den Kindern. Leipzig.] (F) (BG) (*)
Eggermont, J. P. M. (1964) Taalverwerving bij een groep dove kinderen: Een expermenteel onderzoek naar de betekenis van een geluidsmethode voor het spraakafzien. Groningen. (DU) (BI) (D) (X)
Egland, G. O. (1954) An analysis of an exceptional case of retarded speech. J. speech hear. Disord., 19, 239-243. (E) (BG) (SD)
Eliasberg, W. (1928) Über autonome Kindersprache. Mschr. Ohrenheilkunde, 62, 779-783. (G) (IL) (*)
El’kin, D. G. (1955) K voprosu ob osobennostyakh uslovnogo refleksa na kompleksnyy slovesnyy razdrazhitel’. Vopr. Psikhol., 1(4), 79-89. (R) (X) (SY)
El’kin, D. G. (1957) Ob uslovnykh refleksakh na slozhnyye slovesnyye razdrazhiteli u shkol’nikov. In Materialy soveshchaniya po psikhologii, 371-379. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (X) (SC) (SY)
El’konin, D. B. (1958) Razvitiye rechi v doshkol’nom vozraste. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (BG) (BI) (X) (FQ) (GC-C) (GC-G) (M) (PD) (PH) (PS) (RL) (RS) (SC) (SY) (V)
El’konin, D. B. (1960) Detskaya psikhologiya. Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (BG) (BI) (X) (FQ) (GC-C) (GC-G) (M) (PD) (PH) (PS) (RL) (SO) (SY) (V)
El’konin, D. B. (1964) Razvitiye rechi. In Psikhologiya detey doshkol’nogo vozrasta. Moscow, Prosveshcheniye. (R) (RL) (*)
Emrich, L. (1938) Beobachtungen über Zweisprachigkeit in ihrem Anfangsstadium. Deutschtum im Ausland, 21, 419-442. (G) (B) (BG) (ML)
Endrei, G. (1913) Adalékok a gyermeknyelv fejlödéséhez. A Gyermek, 7(8-9), 461-466, 524-526. (H) (*)
Engel, W. von R. (1964a) Appunti sul linguaggio infantile. Scuola e Città, 15, 660-663. (RL) (TH)
Engel, W. von R. (1964b) Die Entwicklung vom Laut zum Phonem in der Kindersprache. Proc. 5th Internatl Cong. Phon. Sci., 482-485. Basel/New York, Karger. (I) (BB) (BG) (IM) (IN) (PH)
Engel, W. von R. (1946c) L’influenza dei fattori ambientali nello sviluppo linguistico del bambino. Boll. Psicol. appl. (Florence), No. 65-66, 109-114. (E) (I) (BG) (ML)
Engel, W. von R. (1964d) Il prelinguaggio infantile. Brescia. (I) (BB) (CR) (*)
Engel, W. von R. (1965a) Del bilinguismo infantile. Arch. Glottol. Ital., 50, 175-180. (E) (I) (BG) (ML) (MI)
Engel, W. von R. (1965b) Un esempio di “linguistic consciousness” nel bambino piccolo. Orientamenti pedag., 12, 631-633. (I) (BG) (MI) (PH)
Engel, W. von R. (1966) Linguaggio attivo e linguaggio passivo. Orientamenti pedag., 13, 893-894. (E) (I) (BG) (ML) (SC)
Entwisle, D. R. (1966a) Developmental sociolinguistics: A comparative study in four subcultural settings. Sociometry, 29, 67-84. (E) (SO) (SS) (SY) (X)
Entwisle, D. R. (1966b) Form class and children’s word association. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 5, 558-565. (E) (PS) (SS) (SY) (X)
Entwisle, D. R. (1966c) Word associations of young children. Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Univer. Press. (E) (PS) (SO) (SS) (SY) (X)
Entwisle, D. R., & Forsythe, D. F. (1963) Word associations of children: Effect of method of administration. Psychol. Rep., 13, 291-299. (E) (ME) (V) (X)
Entwisle, D. R., Forsyth, D. F., & Muuss, R. (1964) The syntactic- paradigmatic shift in children’s word associations. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 3, 19-29. (E) (FQ) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-V) (RL) (SY) (V) (X)
Ertel, E. (1966) Is the sound character specific or universal for language? Stud, psychol., 3, 216-230. (CZ) (PH) (X) (*)
Ervin, S. M. (1961) Changes with age in the verbal determinants of word association. Amer. J. Psychol, 74, 361-372. (E) (PS) (SY) (TH)
Ervin, S. M. (1964a) Imitation and structural change in children’s language. In New directions in the study of language, ed. by E. H. Lenneberg, 163-189. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (E) (BG) (X) (GC-N) (GC-T) (IM) (M) (NG) (PS-N) (PS-V) (Q) (SY) (TH)
Ervin, S. M. (1964b) Review of Language in the crib, by R. H. Weir. Internati J. Amer. Ling., 30, 420-424. (E) (BB) (FQ) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (SY) (V)
Ervin-Tripp, S. M. (1966) Language development. In Review of child development research, ed. by M. Hoffman & L. Hoffman, Vol. 2, 55-105. Ann Arbor, Univer. Mich. Press. (BI) (RL)
Ervin, S. M., & Foster, G. (1960) The development of meaning in children’s descriptive terms. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol., 61, 271-275. [Also in: (1963) Research readings in child psychology, ed. by D. S. Palermo & L. P. Lipsitt, 344-350. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] [Also in: (1967) The psychology of language, thought, and instruction: Readings, ed. by J. de Cecco, 276-282. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (E) (X) (SS)
Ervin, S. M., & Miller, W. (1963) Language development. In Yearb. Natl Soc. Stud. Educ., ed by H. W. Stevenson, Vol. 62, Part 1, 108-143. Chicago, Univer. Chicago Press. (BB) (BI) (CR) (FW) (GC) (M) (PA) (PS) (RL) (SC) (SP) (SS) (SY) (V)
Ervin-Tripp, S. M., & Slobin, D. I. (1966) Psycholinguistics. Annu. Rev. Psychol, 17, 435-474. (BI) (RL)
Eschricht, D. F. (1853) Wie lernen Kinder sprechen? (Vortrag gehalten im Wissenschaftlichen Verein zu Berlin.) Berlin. [Dutch transl.: (1853) Hoe leert het kind spreken? Leeuwarden.] (D) (TH) (*)
Eschricht, D. F. (1858) Om den islandske sproglaverske sæunn. Dansk Maanedsskrift, 8, 379-402. (IC) (BG) (IL) (TW)
Ettmayr, A. (1910) Von Amba bis Massi; Ein Jahr Sprachentwicklung eines Hilfsschülers. Z. exp. Pädag., 11, 23-43. (AF) (*)
Everhart, R. W. (1953) The relationship between articulation and other developmental factors in children. J. speech hear. Disord., 18, 332-338. (E) (PD) (PH) (X)
Everhart, R. W. (1960) Literature survey of growth and development factors in articulation maturation. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 59-69. (AP) (PH) (RL) (SX) (TH)
Ewing, A. W. G. (1931) Aphasia in children. Oxford. (A) (*)
F
Fairbanks, G. (1942) An acoustical study of the pitch of infant hunger wails. Child Develpm., 13, 227-232. (AC) (CR) (*)
Fairbanks, G., & Spriestersbach, D. C. (1950) A study of minor organic deviations in “functional” disorders of articulation. J. speech hear. Disord., 15, 60-69. (E) (AP) (PH) (SX) (X) (*)
Farrell, M. (1953) Understanding of time relations of five-, six-, and seven-year-old children of high I. Q. J. educ. Res., 46, 587-594. (E) (SS) (*)
Faust, B. C. (1794) Die Perioden des menschlichen Lebens. (TH) (*)
Feifel, H., & Lorge, I. (1950) Qualitative differences in the vocabulary responses of children. J. educ. Psychol., 41, 1-18. (E) (V) (*)
Feldmann, H. (1833) De statu normali functionum corporis humani. Dissert., Bonn. (AP) (TH) (*)
Fenton, J. C. (C. 1925) A practical psychology of babyhood; The mental development and mental hygiene of the first years of life. Boston/New York, Houghton Mifflin. (E) (BG) (*)
Feofanov, M. P. (1930) Rechevaya reaktziya sovremennogo shkol’nika v zavisimosti ot sotziaFno-ekonomicheskoy i bytovoy sredy. In Problemy sovremennoy psikhologii, Vol. 5. Moscow, Gosizdat. (R) (SO) (V) (X) (*)
Feofanov, M. P. (1948) Osobennosti postroyeniya prostogo predlozheniya v rechi uchashchikhsya vspomogatel’noy shkoly. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 19. (R) (SD) (SY) (*)
Feofanov, M. P. (1955) Ocherki psikhologii usvoyeniya russkogo yazyka uchashchimisya vspomogatel’noy shkoly. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (GC-C) (PS-PP) (SD) (SY) (*)
Feofanov, M. P. (1956) Usvoyeniya uchashchimisya vspomogatel’nykh shkol predlozhnogo upravleniya. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (GC-C) (PS-PP) (SD) (SY) (*)
Feofanov, M. P. (1958) Ob upotreblenii predlogov v detskoy rechi. Vopr. Psikhol, 4(3), 118-124. (R) (PS-P)
Feofanov, M. P. (1962) Usvoyeniye uchashchimisya pis’mennoy rechi. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (X) (GC-C) (PS-PP) (SY)
Ferguson, C. A. (1956) Arabic baby talk. In For Roman Jakobson, ed. by M. Halle, 121-128. The Hague, Mouton. (AR) (PA)
Ferguson, C. A. (1963) Review of Funciones gramaticales en el habla infantil, by S. Gili Gaya. Word, 19, 106-108. (S) (GC) (M) (PS-A)
Ferguson, C. A. (1964) Baby talk in six languages. In The ethnography of communication, ed. by J. J. Gumperz & D. Hymes, 103-114. Amer. Anthropologist, 66(6), Part 2. (AI) (AR) (CO) (E) (GI) (MA) (S) (PA) (BT)
Ferguson, C. A. (1966) Linguistic theory as behavioral theory. In Brain function, ed. by E. C. Carterette. Vol. 3, Speech, language, and communication, 249-261. Berkeley/Los Angeles, Univer. Calif. Press. (TH)
Ferreti, . (1919) L’imitazione e l’infanzia. Riv. Psicol. (IM) (*)
Ferri, L. (1879) Note su una bambina. Fil. Scuole Ital. (I) (BG) (*)
Ferrier, E. E. (1966) An investigation of the I. T. P. A. performance of children with functional defects of articulation. Except. Child., 32, 625-629. (E) (ME) (PD) (*)
Filatov, V. S. (1940) Rech’ shkol’nika: Psikhologicheskiye osobennosti pis’ma i ustnoy rechi shkol’nika 4 klassa. Uch. zap. Kalinskogo Pedinst., 10(1). (R) (SY) (*)
Fischer, J. L. (1958) Social influences on the choice of a linguistic variant. Word, 14, 47-56. [Also in: (1964) Language in culture and society: A reader in linguistics and anthropology, ed. by D. Hymes, 483-488. New York, Harper & Row.] [Also in: (1964) Readings in applied English linguistics, ed. by H. B. Allen, 307-315. [2nd ed.] New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts.] (E) (M) (PS-V) (SO)
Fisher, M. S. (1932) Language patterns of preschool children. J. exp. Educ., 1, 70-85. (E) (SY) (*)
Fisher, M. S. (1934) Language patterns of preschool children. Child Develpm. Monogr., No. 15. New York, Teach. Coll., Columbia Univer. (SO) (SX) (TW) (*)
Fisichelli, V. R., Eichbauer, J., & Rosenfeld, L. S. (1961) Volume-unit graphs: Their production and applicability in studies of infants’ cries. J. Psychol, 52, 423-427. (CR) (ME) (*)
Fisichelli, V. R., & Karelitz, S. (1966) Frequency spectra of the cries of normal infants and those with Down’s syndrome. Psychonomic Sci., 6, 195-196. (E) (AC) (CR) (MR) (*)
Fitchen, M. (1931) Speech and music development of a one year old child. Child Develpm., 2, 326-328. (E) (BG) (PH) (PS) (V) (*)
Fitzgerald, J. A. (1936) The overlap of child and adult vocabularies. J. exp. Educ., 4, 364-367. (V) (*)
Fitzgerald, M. H. (1949) Vocabulary development for acoustically handicapped children. Amer. Ann. Deaf, 94, 409-449. (D) (TH) (V) (*)
Fitzsimons, R. (1958) Developmental, psychological, and educational factors in children with nonorganic articulation problems. Child Develpm., 29, 481-489. (E) (PD) (PH) (X)
Flajshans, V. (1941) Z řeči našich děti. Listy Filol, 68, 364-374. (CZ) (PH)
Flavell, J. H., & Stedman, D. J. (1961) A developmental study of judgments of semantic similarity. J. genet. Psychol., 98, 279-293. (E) (X) (SS)
Fletcher, S. G., Casteel, R. L., & Bradley, D. P. (1961) Tongue-thrust swallow, speech articulation, and age. J. speech hear Disord., 26, 201-208. (E) (AP) (PD) (X)
Flomer, R. M., Viehweg, R., & Ruzicka, W. R. (1966) The communicative disorders of children with kernicteric athetosis: 2. Problems in language comprehension and use. J. speech hear. Disord., 31, 60-68. (E) (AP) (V) (*)
Flores, P. M., & Irwin, O. C. (1956) Status of five front consonants in the speech of cerebral palsied children. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 238-244. (E) (LP) (PH) (X)
Fodor, J. A. (1964) A review of Symbol formation: An organismic-developmental approach to language and the expression of thought, by H. Werner & B. Kaplan. Language, 40, 566-578. (SS) (TH)
Fodor, J. (1966) How to learn to talk: Some simple ways. In The genesis of language: A psycholinguistic approach, ed. by F. Smith & G. A. Miller, 105-122. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (SY) (TH)
Fonzi, A. (1960) Problemi di psicologia infantile. Turin, Boringhieri. [2nd ed.](I)(*)
Forchhammer, E. (1939) Über einige Fälle von eigentümlichen Sprachbildungen bei Kindern. Arch. ges. Psychol., 104, 395-438. (DA) (E) (ES) (G) (IC) (BG) (IL) (TW)
Foss, B. M. (1964) Mimicry in mynas (Gracula religiosa): A test of Mowrer’s theory. Brit. J. Psychol., 55, 85-88. (TH)
Foulke, K., & Stinchfield, S. M. (1929) The speech development of four infants under two years of age. Pedag. Seminary, 36, 140-171. (E) (BG) (PH) (V) (*)
Frachtenberg, L. (1917) Abnormal types of speech in Quileute. Internatl J. Amer. Ling., 1, 295. (AL) (AI) (PH) (*)
Fraiberg, S., Siegel, B. L., & Gibson, R. (1966) The role of sound in the search behavior of a blind infant. The psychoanalytic Study of the Child, 21, 327-357. (BL) (*)
Francescato, G. (1961) Phonemic theory and first language learning. Proc. 4th Internatl Cong. Phon. Sci. (Helsinki), 616-619. (BB) (PH) (TH)
Francescato, G. (1964) Alcuni esempi di formazioni infantili. Lingua nostra, 25, 50-53. (I) (BG) (PH) (SS)
Francescato, G. (1965a) Dante e il linguaggio infantile. Lingua nostra, 26, 69-73. (I)
Francescato, G. (1965b) Linguistica, psicologia e lo studio del linguaggio infantile. Accad. Nazionale dei Lincei (Rome), Series 8, Vol. 11, Fascicle 7. (I) (BG) (CR) (M) (PH) (RL) (SC) (SS) (SY) (V)
Franke, C. (1895) Beobachtungen über die Sprachentwickling bei Kindern und daraus geschöpfte Vermutungen über die Sprachentwicklung der Menschheit. Süddeutsche Blätter für höhere Unterrichtsanstalten, 3, 125. (TH) (*)
Franke, C. (1899) Sprachentwicklung der Kinder und der Menschheit. In Handbuch der Pädagogik, ed. by Rein, 6, 751-794. [Sep. ed. 1899.] [2nd ed., 8, 742-790. 1903-1911.] (PH) (RL) (TH) (*)
Franke, C. (1910-11) Über Sprachentwicklung; Abschnitt 2, Sprachentwicklung der Neandertalrasse. Neuland des Wissens, 2, 174-182, 200-213, 250-263. (TH) (*)
Franke, C. (1912) Über die erste Lautstufe der Kinder. Anthropos, 7, 663-676. (AP) (PH) (TH) (*)
Fraser,C., Bellugi, U., & Brown, R. (1963) Control of grammar in imitation, comprehension, and production. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 2, 121-135. (E) (X) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (IM) (ME) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SC) (SD) (SY) (TH)
Frenzel, F. von (1902) Stufen in der Sprachentwicklung des Kindes. Die Kinderfehler, 7, 25-33, 74-82. (RL) (TH) (*)
Friedrich, G. (1906) Psychologische Beobachtungen an zwei Knaben. Beitr. Kinderforsch, u. Heilerzieh 17. (G) (BG) (M)
Fritzsch, T. (1906) Zur Geschichte der Kindersprachforschung und Kinderbeobachtung. Z. Phil. Pädag., 497-507. (RL) (*)
Frontali, G. (1943-44) Lo sviluppo del linguaggio articolato nel bambino. Vox Romanica, 7, 214-243. (I) (BG) (BB) (IM) (PS) (SY) (V)
Fronzaroli, P. (1957) Il linguaggio del bambino. Bologna. (I) (*)
Fröscheis, E. (1918) Kindersprache und Aphasie. Abh. Neurol., Psychiat., Psychol (Berlin), 3. (A) (*)
Fröscheis, E. (1925) Psychologie der Sprache. Leipzig/Vienna, Deuticke. (A) (IM) (RL) (*)
Furlan, I. (1963) Govorni razvoj djeteta. Belgrade, Savremena škola. (IM) (ME) (PH) (RL) (TH) (V)
Furth, H. G. (1966) Thinking without language: Psychological implications of deafness. New York, Free Press. (D)
Fuster, M. (1903) Observations sur le langage de deux petites filles, de quatre mois a trois ans. Bull. Soc. Libre Étud. Psychol. Enfant, No. 10, 3, 253-255. (F) (BG) (*)
Fuster, M. (1906) Perception d’enfants. Bull. Soc. Libre Étud. Psychol. Enfant. (F) (SP) (*)
G
Gad, L. (1932) Børn paa opdagelse i sprogets verden. Copenhagen. (DA) (*)
Gale, M. C., & Gale, H. (1900) The vocabularies of three children in one family to two and a half years of age. Psychol. Stud., 70-117. (E) (V) (*)
Gale, M. C., & Gale, H. (1902a) Children’s vocabularies. Pop. Sci. Monthly, 61, 45-51. (E) (V) (*)
Gale, M. C., & Gale, H. (1902b) The vocabularies of three children in one family at two and three years of age. Pedag. Seminary, 9, 422-435. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Gallagher, J. R. (1950) Specific language disability. New England J. Med., 242, 436-440. (AP) (PD) (TH) (*)
Galton, F. (1883) Inquiries into human faculty and its development. London. (TH) (*)
Gansl, I. (1939) Vocabulary: Its measurement and growth. New York. [Also in: (1939) Arch. Psychol., 33, No. 236.] (V) (*)
Garbini, A. (1889) L’evoluzione della voce nei bambini. Verona. (PH) (*)
Gardner, W. H., Hill, S. D., & Carano, H. N. (1962) Esophageal speech in a twelve-year-old boy: A case report. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 227-231. (E) (AP) (BG)
Garvin, P. L. (1955) Review of Ksaltowanie się mowy dziecka, by L. Kaczmarek. Language, 31, 104-105. (P)
Gavrilova, N. I., & Stakhorskaya, M. I. (1916) Dnevnik materi. Moscow. (R) (BG) (*)
Gedda, L., Bianchi, L., Bianchi, A., & Neroni, L. (1955) La voce dei gemelli. Acta genet, med. genellol, 2, 121. (TW) (*)
Gedda, L., Fiori-Ratti, L., & Bruno, G. (1960) La voix chez les jumeaux monozygotiques. Folia Phoniatrica, 12, 81-94. (TW) (*)
Gehlen, A. (1938) Das Problem des Sprachursprungs. Forsch. Fortschr., 14, 291-293. (AP) (TH) (*)
Geiger, L. (1868) Ursprung und Entwicklung der menschlichen Sprache und Vernunft. (TH) (*)
Geiger, L. (1869) Der Ursprung der Sprache. [2nd ed. 1878.] (TH) (*)
Gens, G. W. (1950) Correlations of neurological findings, psychological analyses, and speech disorders among institutionalized epileptics. Training School Bull., 47, 3-18. Wineland, N. J. (E) (AP) (*)
Gens, G. W., & Bibey, M. L. (1952) Congenital aphasia: A case report. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 32-38. (E) (A) (BG)
Geppertowa, L. (1955) Rozwój rozumowania i wyrażania stosunków określonych przyimkami u dzieci 2- i 3-letnich. Studia psychologiczne, Vol. 2. (P) (PS-PP) (SS) (*)
Geppertowa, L. (1958) Czy głuchoniemi moga mówić? Wiedza życie, No. 5. (P) (D) (*)
Geppertowa, L. (1959a) Rola spójnikow hipotaktycznych w ujmowaniu stosunków przez dzieci. Krakow. (P) (SS) (SY) (*)
Geppertowa, L. (1959b) Rozwój rozumienia i posługiwania się pojęciami stosunków, wyrazonymi przez spójnik ‘zęby’ u dzieci do lat piecu. Przeglad Psychol, No. 3. (P) (SS) (SY) (*)
Geppertowa, L. (1963a) Rozumienie stosunków określonych niektórymi przyimkami u uczniow gJuchoniemych. Psychol Wychowawcza, No. 1. (P) (D) (*)
Geppertowa, L. (1963b) Wpływ składni zdania mowy migowej na rozumienie zdania językowego. [Eng. abstr.: Influence of the syntax of sign language on the understanding of ordinary language.] In Rozwój i wychowanie, ed. by M. Zebrowska, 85-105. Warsaw, Nasza Księgarnia. (P) (D) (SC) (SY) (X)
Geraskov, M. (1939) Sprachpsychologische Eigentümlichkeiten in den freien Aufsätzen der Volksschüler. Sofia. (G) (M) (SY) (*)
Gerlach, F. M. (1917) Vocabulary studies. Stud. Educ. Psychol., 1. Colorado Springs. (E) (V) (*)
Geschwind, N. (1965) Disconnection syndromes in animals and men. Brain, 88, 585-644. (A) (AP) (TH)
Gesell, A. (1925) The mental growth of the preschool child: A psychological outline of normal development from birth to the sixth year, including a system of developmental diagnosis. New York, Macmillan. [Rev. ed. 1940.] (E) (*)
Gewirtz, J. L. (1948) Studies in word-fluency: 1. Its relation to vocabulary and mental age. J. genet. Psychol., 72, 165-172. (E) (X) (V)
Gheorgov, I. A. (1905) Die ersten Anfänge des sprachlichen Ausdrucks für das Selbstbewusstsein bei Kindern. Arch. Ges. Psychol., 5, 329-404. [Also in: (1905) Sammlung von Abhandlungen zur psychologischen Pädagogik, 2(1), ed. by E. Meumann. Leipzig.] (B) (BG) (GC-G) (GC-P) (GC-N) (PS-P) (PS-V)
Gheorgov, I. A. (1906) Pripos k”m gramatichniya razvoy na detzkiya govor. Godishnik na Sofiyskiya Universitet. Sofia. (B) (BG) (*)
Gheorgov, I. A. (1908) Ein Beitrag zur grammatischen Entwicklung der Kindersprache. Leipzig, Engelmann. [Also in: (1908) Arch. ges. Psychol, 11, 242-432.] (B) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY) (V)
Gheorgov, I. A. (1910) Vocabulary in child language. [In Bulgarian.] Godishnik na Sofiyiskiya Universitet. Sofia. [2nd ed. 1911.] (B) (V) (*)
Gheorgov, I. A. (1912) Le développement du langage chez l’enfant. Prem. Cong. Internatl Pédologie, Rapports, Vol. 2. Brussels, Misch & Thron/Ghent, Ledeberg. (B) (BG) (*)
Gili Gaya, S. (1960) Funciones gramaticales en el habla infantil. Consejo Super, de Enseñanza de Puerto Rico, Publ. Pedag., Serie 2, 14. Rio Piedras, Univer. Puerto Rico. (S) (GC) (M) (PS-A) (*)
Ginneken, J. van (1907) Principes de linguistique psychologique. Paris, Rivière. (DU) (TH) (*)
Ginneken, J. van (1917) De roman van een kleuter. Nijmegen. (DU) (BG) (PS) (SY)
Ginneken, J. van (1923) La biologie de la base d’articulation. In Psychologie du langage, 266-320. Paris, Alcan. (AP) (PH) (TH) (*)
Ginneken, J. van (1924) De ontdekkingen van den kleuter. Utrecht/ Nijmegen. (DU) (BG) (PS) (SY)
Glanzer, M. (1962) Toward a psychology of language structure. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 303-314. (E) (X) (GC) (PS) (RL) (SY) (X) (TH)
Glasner, P. J., & Rosenthal, D. (1957) Diagnosis of stuttering in young children. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 288-295. (E) (ST) (X)
Glassburg, J. A. (1929) The development of speech. Med. J. Ree., 2, 69-. (*)
Glovsky, L., & Rigrodsky, S. (1964) A developmental analysis of mentally deficient children. Train. Sch. Bull., 61, 76-96. (E) (A) (MR) (*)
Glucksberg, S., Krauss, R. M., & Weisberg, R. (1966) Referential communication in nursery school children: Method and some preliminary findings. J. exp. Child Psychol., 3, 333-342. (E) (SY) (SS) (X)
Goates, W. A., & Bosma, J. F. (1958) Disability of speech resulting from malpositioned cervical spine following poliomyelitis. J. speech hear. Disord., 23, 283-293. (E) (AP) (PH) (X)
Goda, S. (1959) Language skills of profoundly deaf adolescent children. J. speech hear. Res., 2, 369-376. (E) (D) (X) (*)
Goda, S. (1960) Vocal utterances of young moderately and severely retarded non-speaking children. Amer. J. ment. Def., 65, 269-273. (E) (CR) (MR) (MV) (RS) (*)
Goda, S. (1961) Clinical forum: Stuttering manifestations following spinal meningitis. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 392-393. (E) (AP) (BG) (ST)
Goda, S., & Smith, K. (1959) Speech stimulation practices among mothers of preschool children. J. speech hear. Disord., 24, 150-153. (E) (PA) (X)
Goehl, H. (1964) Review of Language in the crib, by R. H. Weir. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 197-199. (E) (FQ) (GC) (M) (PH) (SY) (V)
Goeman, A. (1937) Remmingen en storingen in de ontwikkeling van de kindersprak. The Hague, Haga. (DU) (LP) (*)
Goldammer, H. (1883) Das Buch vom Kinde. Berlin. (G) (CR) (*)
Goldenberg, S. (1950) An explanatory study of some aspects of idiopathic language retardation. J. speech hear. Disord., 15, 221-233. (E) (A) (ME) (MR) (SD) (X)
Goldfarb, W., Braunstein, P., & Lorge, I. (1956) Childhood schizophrenia, Symposium, 1955:5. A study of speech patterns in a group of schizophrenic children. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 26, 544-555. (E) (IN) (PH) (PP) (*)
Goodenough, F. L. (1938) The use of pronouns by young children: A note on the development of self-awareness. J. genet. Psychol., 52, 333-346. (E) (GC-P) (PS-P) (*)
Goodman, M. (1936) Language development in a nursery school child. Child Res. Clin. Ser. 2, No. 4. (E) (BG) (*)
Goodwin, F. B. (1955) A consideration of etiologies in 454 cases of speech retardation. J. speech hear. Disord., 20, 300-303. (E) (MR) (SD) (X)
Gostischa, E. (1940) Die sprachliche Entfaltung sozialer Lebendigkeit beim Kinde. Z. Psychol., 149, 127-204. [Also in: (1940) Beiträge zur Psychologie des gehalterfüllten Lebens, ed. by B. Petermann, 1.] (G) (*)
Gottlieb, G., Doran, C., & Whitley, S. (1964) Cerebral dominance and speech acquisition in deaf children. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol., 69, 182-189. (E) (AP) (D) (*)
Gottschick, J., & Buchna, E. (1939) Sprachpsychologische Zwillingsuntersuchung. Arch. ges. Psychol., 103, 1-70. (TW) (*)
Gough, P., & Segal, E. (1965) Comment on “The insufficiency of a finite state model for verbal reconstructive memory.” Psychonomic Sci., 3, 155-156. (SY) (TH)
Goyer. See Hoyer.
Grammont, M. (1902) Observations sur le langage des enfants. In Mélanges linguistiques offerts à M. Antoine Meillet, 61-82. Paris, Klincksieck. (F) (BG) (M) (PH) (RR) (*)
Grant, J. R. (1915) A child’s vocabulary and its growth. Pedag. Seminary, 22, 183-203. (E) (BG) (B) (*)
Greene, M. C. L. (1957) Speech of children before and after removal of tonsils and adenoids. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 361-370. (E) (AP) (PD) (X)
Greene, M. C. L. (1960) Speech analysis of 263 cleft palate cases. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 43-48. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Grégoire, A. (1911a) Edmond. Bull. Acad. Royal. Belgique. Brussels. (F) (PA) (*)
Grégoire, A. (1911b) Essai sur les transformations d’un prénom d’enfant. Brussels/Paris. (F) (BG) (PA) (PS-P) (*)
Grégoire, A. (1937) L’apprentissage du langage: Vol. 1. Les deux premières années. Paris, Droz. (F) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY) (V)
Grégoire, A. (1939a) Edmond–Puxi–Michel; les prénoms et les surnoms de trois enfants. Liège/Paris, Droz. (F) (PA) (*)
Grégoire, A. (1939b) La linguistique. Paris, Delagrave. [6th ed. 1948.] (F) (BG) (PH)(*)
Grégoire, A. (1947) L’apprentissage du langage: Vol. 2. La troisième année et les années suivantes. Liège/Paris, Droz. (F) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY) (V)
Grégoire, A. (1948) L’apprentissage du langage. Lingua, 1, 162-174. (F) (BG) (PH) (PS-AR) (PS-V) (V)
Grégoire, A. (1950) La renaissance scientifique de la linguistique enfantine. Lingua, 2, 355-398. (ML) (RL) (*)
Grewel, F. (1959) How do children acquire the use of language? Phonetica, 3, 193-202. Basel. (BB) (IM) (IN) (PA) (PD) (PH) (SO) (TH)
Grewel, F. (1962) Ontwikkelingslinguistiek en kinderpsychologie. Nederl. Tijdschr. Psychol, 17(4), 373-388. (DU) (RL) (TH)
Grewel, F.,& Bos, H. (1964) Multipel gestoorde dove kinderen. Groningen. (DU) (D) (X)
Grigsby, O. J. (1932) An experimental study of the development of concepts of relationship in preschool children as evidenced by their expressive ability. J. exp. Educ., 1, 144-162. (E) (PS-PP) (*)
Grimm, J. (1949) Volkssprache und Kindersprache. In Aus den Schriften. Regensburg. (TH) (*)
Grishakova, V. (1915) Iz dnevnika materi. Doshk. vospit., 6-7. (R) (BG) (*)
Grishakova, V. (1916) Iz dnevnika materi. Doshk. vospit., 5-9. (R) (BG) (*)
Gruber, J. S. (1966) Playing with distinctive features in the babbling of infants. M.I.T. Res. Lab. Electronics, Quart. Prog. Rept, 81, 181-186. (E) (BB) (BG) (PH)
Gruber, J. S. (1967) Topicalization in child language. Foundations of Lang., 3, 37-65. (E) (BG) (M) (Q) (PS-N) (PS-P) (PS-V) (SY) (TH)
Grünewald, F. (1900a) Die Entwicklung der Wortbedeutung im Geistesleben des Kindes. Pädag.-psychol Stud., 1, 21-23. (G) (SS) (*)
Grünewald, F. (1900b) Spontane Definitionen: Die Worterklärungen der Kinder. Pädag.-psychol Stud., 1, 19-21. (G) (MI) (SS) (*)
Guernsey, M. (1928) Eine genetische Studie über Nachahmung. Z. Psychol, 107, 105-178. (G) (BG) (CR) (IM) (PH) (*)
Guillaume, P. (1925) L’imitation chez l’enfant. Paris, Alcan. (F) (BG) (CR) (IM) (PH) (*)
Guillaume, P. (1927a) Les débuts de la phrase dans le langage de l’enfant. J. Psychol norm, pathol, 24, 1-25. (F) (BG) (M) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SY)
Guillaume, P. (1927b) Le développement des éléments formels dans le langage de l’enfant. J. Psychol norm, pathol, 24, 203-229. (F) (BG) (GC) (M) (PS)
Gumperz, J. J. (1965) Language. In Biennial Review of Anthropology, ed. by B. J. Siegel, 84-120. Stanford, Stanford Univer. Press. (RL)
Guttmann, E. (1942) Aphasia in children. Brain, 65, 205-219. (A) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1896) Die Sprachlaute des Kindes und der Naturvölker. Westermann Monatshefte, 79, 358-367. (IM) (PD) (PH) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1897) Die Sprache des Kindes und der Naturvölker. 3. Internatl Kong. Psychol. München, 1896. Bericht. (TH) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1899) Die Sprachlaute des Kindes und der Naturvölker. Z. pädag. Psychol., 1, 28-40. (IM) (PD) (PH) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1902) Die Sprachentwicklung des Kindes und ihre Hemmungen. Die Kinderfehler, 7, 193-216. (LP) (SD) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1902-03) Über die Schreiatmung des Säuglings. Verh. der 19. Versamm. Ges. Kinderheilkunde in Karlsbad, 209-213. (CR) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1903) Fortschritte auf dem Gebiete der Erforschung der kindlichen Sprache in den Jahren 1898-1902. Arch. ges. Psychol., 1, 7-20. (RL) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (1922) Psychologie der Sprache. In Handbuch der vergleichenden Psychologie, ed. by . Kaffka, Vol. 2. Munich. (*)
Gutzmann, H. (19—a) Die Entwicklung der Sprache und deren Hemmnisse. In Das Buch vom Kinde, ed. by A. Schreiber, 1, Part 2, 9-18. (LP) (SD) (*)
Gutzmann, H. (19—b) Sprachstörungen. In Handbuch der Pädagogik, ed. by . Rein, Vol. 8, 790-804. [2nd ed.] (BI) (LP) (SD) (*)
Gvozdev, A. (1927) Usvoyeniye rebenkom rodnogo yazyka. In Detskaya rech’, ed. by N. Rybnikov. Moscow. (R) (BG) (*)
Gvozdev, A. N. (1948) Usvoyeniye rebenkom zvukovoy storony russkogo yazyka. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. [Also in: (1961) Voprosy izucheniya detskoy rechi. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR.] (R) (BG) (PH)
Gvozdev, A. N. (1949) Formirovaniye u rebenka grammaticheskogo stroya russkogo yazyka. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. 2 parts. [Also in: (1961) Voprosy izucheniya detskoy rechi. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR.] (R) (BG) (FW) (GC-A) (GC-C) (GC-G) (GC-M) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-PP) (PS-P) (PS-V) (SY) (V)
H
Haas, W. (1963) Phonological analysis of a case of dyslalia. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 239-246. (E) (AC) (ME) (PD) (PH)
Haggerty, A. D. (1959) The effect of long-term hospitalization upon the language development of children. J. genet. Psychol, 94, 205-209. (E) (V) (*)
Haggerty, L. C. G. (1930) What a two-and-one-half-year-old child said in one day. J. genet. Psychol37, 75-101. (E) (BG)
Hala, B. (1948) Několik příspěvku k popisu dětske výslovnosti. Paedologicke rozhledy, 4, 193-206. (CZ) (PH) (X)
Haldemann, S. S. (1880) Note on the invention of words. Proc. Amer, philol Ass. (E) (M) (*)
Hale, H. (1886) The origin of language and the antiquity of speaking man. Proc. Amer. Ass. Advance. Sci., 35. (E) (IL) (TH) (*)
Hale, H. (1888) The development of language. Proc. Canad. Inst., Third Series, 6, 92-134. (E) (IL) (*)
Hale, L. L. (1951) A consideration of thiamin supplement in prevention of stuttering in preschool children. J. speech hear. Disord., 16, 327-333. (E) (AP) (ST) (X)
Hall, G. S. (1891a) The contents of children’s minds on entering school. Pedag. Seminary, 1, 139-173. (E) (M) (MI) (*)
Hall, G. S. (1891b) Notes on the study of infants. Pedag. Seminary, 1, 127-138. (E) (BG) (CR) (PH)
Hall, W. F. (1962) A study of the articulatory skills of children from three to six years of age. Doct. dissert., Univer. Missouri. (E) (AC) (FQ) (PH) (X) (*)
Hall, Mrs. W. S. (1896-97) The first five hundred days of a child’s life. Child Study Monthly (Chicago), 2, 330, 394, 458, 522-537, 586-608, 650. (E) (BG) (PH) (V) (*)
Hall, Mrs. W. S. (1902) The vocabulary of a six-year-old boy. J. Childhood Adolescence, 2, 1-13. (E) (BG) (FQ) (PS) (V) (*)
Hammill, D. D., & Irwin, O. C. (1965) Speech differences among cerebral palsy subclasses. Except. Child., 31, 277-280. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Hannigan, H. (1956) Rh child: Deaf or “aphasie”? 3. Language and behavior problems of the Rh “aphasie” child. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 413-417. (E) (A) (AP) (IL) (SC) (X)
Harder, K. B. (1955) The vocabulary of marble playing. Publ. Amer. Dialect Soc., 23, 3-33. (E) (SO) (*)
Hardy, W. G. (1965) On language disorders in young children: A reorganization of thinking. J. speech hear. Disord., 30, 3-16. (LP) (A) (TH)
Hardy, W. G., Pauls, M. D., & Haskins, H. L. (1958) An analysis of language development in children with impaired hearing. Acta Oto-laryngologica (Sweden), Supplemt no. 141. (E) (AC) (D) (FQ) (PH) (SC)
Harms, I. E., & Spiker, C. C. (1959) Factors associated with the performance of young children on intelligence scales and tests of speech development. J. genet. Psychol., 94, 3-22. (E) (ME) (X) (*)
Haroian, R. D. (1951) Preliminary validation of Mansur’s speech sound discrimination test in the kindergarten and first grade. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Boston Univer. (E) (ME) (SP) (*)
Harrell, L. E., Jr. (1957) A comparison of the development of oral and written language in school-age children. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 22, No. 3. (E) (PS) (X) (*)
Harwood, F. W. (1959) Quantitative study of the speech of Australian children. Lang. & Speech, 2, 236-271. (E) (FQ) (GC) (M) (PS) (SY)
Hattwick, M. S. (1932) A preliminary study of pitch inflection in the speech of preschool children. Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci., 39, 237-242. (E) (PH) (*)
Hawker, J. R., Geertz, V. W., & Shrago, M. (1964) Prompting and confirmation in slight vocabulary learning by retardates. Amer. J. ment. Def., 68, 751-756. (E) (MR) (V) (*)
Hawthorne, J. W. (1934) An attempt to measure certain phases of speech. J. genet. Psychol., 10, 399-414. (*)
Hayes, C. (1951) The ape in our house. New York, Harper. (TH)
Hayes, K. J., & Hayes, C. (1951) The intellectual development of a home-raised chimpanzee. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 102, 105-120. (TH)
Hedgecock, L. D. (1955) Speech and hearing problems of the young deaf child. Amer. Ann. Deaf, 100, 435-445. (D) (TH) (*)
Heider, F. K., & Heider, G. M. (1940a) A comparison of sentence structure of deaf and hearing children. Psychol. Monogr., 52(1), 42-103. (E) (D) (SY) (*)
Heider, F. K., & Heider, G. M. (1940b) A study of phonetic symbolism of deaf children. Psychol. Monogr., 52(1), 23-41. (E) (D) (PH) (*)
Heilig, M. R. (1913) A child’s vocabulary. Pedag. Seminary, 20, 1-16. (E) (V) (*)
Hempl, M. (1897) The speech of my children. (E) (BG) (*)
Henderson, E. C. (1939) Baby’s first words. Speech Mag., 4, 182- . (E) (FW) (*)
Henderson, F. (1935) A study of the articulation of consonants by normal institutionalized children. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Univer. Wisconsin. (E) (PH) (*)
Henderson, F. (1937) Objectivity and constancy of judgment in articulation testing. J. educ. Res., 31, 348-356. (ME) (PH) (*)
Henry, J., & Henry, Z. (1940) Speech disturbances in Pilaga children. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 10, 362-369. (AI) (LP) (*)
Herlin, (1909) Acquisition du langage par l’enfant. Brussels. [3rd ed.] (F) (*)
Heřman, K. (1936) Die Anfänge der menschlichen Sprache, Vol. 1. Prague, Taussig & Taussig. (CR) (*)
Hess, D. A. & McDonald, E. T. (1960) Consonantal nasal pressure in cleft palate speakers. J. speech hear. Res., 3, 201-211. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X) (*)
Hess, R. D., & Shipman, V. (1965) Early experience and the socialization of cognitive modes in children. Child Develpm., 36, 869-886. (E) (X) (PA) (SO)
Hesseling, D. C. (1909) Kindertaal. De Gids, 524-543. (DU) (BG) (*)
Hetzer, H. (1926) Die symbolische Darstellung in der frühen Kindheit. Vienna/Leipzig/New York, Dtsch. Verlag Jugend u. Volk. (G) (SS) (*)
Hetzer, H., & Reindorf, B. (1928) Sprachentwicklung und soziales Milieu. Z. angew. Psychol., 29, 449-462. (G) (SO) (V)
Hetzer, H., & Tudor-Hart, B. H. (1927) Die frühesten Reaktionen auf die menschliche Stimme. Quellen u. Stud. Jugendkunde, 5, 103-124. (RS) (*)
Heuyer, G. (1955) Troubles du langage chez l’enfant. J. Psychol norm. pathol, 52, 232-242. (F) (A) (BG) (D) (MU) (SD) (TH)
Higginbotham, D. C. (1961) A study of speech of kindergarten, first and second grade children in audience situations with particular attention to maturation and learning as evidenced in content, form and delivery. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Northwestern Univer. (E) (GC) (RR) (SY) (*)
Hill, M. J., & Hagerty, R. F. (1962) Speech following pharyngoplasty in postoperative cleft palate subjects. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 179-184. (E) (AP) (*)
Hills, E. C. (1914) The speech of a child two years of age. Dialect Notes, 4, 84-100. (E) (BG) (PH) (PS) (SY) (*)
Hinckley, A. C. (1915) A case of retarded speech development. Pedag. Seminary, 22, 121-146. (E) (SD) (*)
Hirt, H. (1921) Etymologie der neuhochdeutschen Sprache. Munich, Beck. [2nd ed.] (G) (BB) (M) (RR) (*)
Hixon, T. J., & Hardy, J. C. (1964) Restricted motility of the speech articulators in cerebral palsy. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 293-306. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Hoberman, S. E., & Goldfarb, W. (1963) Speech reception thresholds in schizophrenic children. J. speech hear. Res., 6, 101-106. (E) (MR) (X) (PP) (SP) (*)
Hockett, C. F. (1950) Age-grading and linguistic continuity. Language, 26, 449-457. (DI) (SO) (TH)
Hogan, L. E. (1898) A study of a child, illustrated by over 500 original drawings by the child. New York/London. (E) (BG) (*)
Hogerheijde, J. (1911) Hoe leert het kind spreken? Zuid en Noord, 2, 376-408. (BL) (D) (DB)
Holden, E. S. (1877) On the vocabularies of children under two years of age. Transac. Amer. Philol Ass., 8, 58-68. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Holland, A. L. (1967) Some applications of behavioral principles to clinical speech problems. J. speech hear. Disord., 32, 11-17. (LP) (ME) (*)
Hollien, H., & Copeland, R. H. (1965) Speaking fundamental frequency (SFF) characteristics of Mongoloid girls. J. speech hear. Disord., 30, 344-349. (E) (AP) (MR) (*)
Holmes, U. T. (1927) The phonology of an English-speaking child. Amer. Speech, 2, 219-225. (E) (BG) (PH) (*)
Horn, E., Ed. (1925) The commonest words in the spoken vocabulary of children up to and including six years of age. Yearb. Natl Soc. Stud. Educ., 24(1), 186-198. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Horn, E. (1942) Language and meaning. Yearb. Natl Soc. Stud. Educ., 41(2), 377-414. (SS) (*)
Horn, M. D. (1926-27) The thousand and three words most frequently used by kindergarten children. Childhood Educ., 3, 118-122. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Horn, M. D., Chairman, Internatl Kindergarten Union, Child Study Comm. (1928) A study of the vocabulary of children before entering the first grade. Washington, Ass. Childhood Educ./Baltimore, Williams & Wilkins. (E) (V) (*)
Hotyat, F. (1932) Le vocabulaire total parlé d’un enfant de 18 mois à trois ans. L’école nouvelle. (F) (BG) (V) (*)
Howard, R. (1934) A developmental study of triplets. Unpubl. dissert., Univer. Minn. (E) (BG) (TW) (*)
Howard, R. W. (1946) Language development in a group of triplets. J. genet. Psychol., 69, 181-188. (E) (BG) (TW) (*)
Hoyer, A., & Hoyer, G. (1924) Über die Lallsprache eines Kindes. Z. angew. Psychol, 24, 363-384. (G) (R) (BB) (BG) (CR) (FW) (ML) (PH)Hoyer, A. E., & Hoyer, [Deryagina], G. [Cyrillic–Goyer] (1927) Pervyy period yazykovoy deyatel’nosti rebenka. In Detskaya rech’, ed. by N. A. Rybnikova. Moscow. (G) (R) (BG) (ML) (*)
Humboldt, W. von (1836) Über die Verschiedenheit des menschlichen Sprachbaues und ihren Einfluss auf die geistige Entwickelung des Menschengeschlechts. Berlin, Königliche Akad. der Wiss. (TH)
Humphreys, M. W. (1880) A contribution to infantile linguistics. Transac. Amer. Philol Ass., 11, 5-17. (E) (BG) (PH) (PS) (V) (*)
Hun, E. R. (1868) Singular development of language in a child. Monthly J. psychol Med. (E) (BG) (IL) (*)
Huth, A. (1919) Die Nebensätze in der Kindersprache. Z. pädag. Psychol, 20, 163-183. (G) (SY) (*)
Huttenlocher, J. (1964) Children’s language: Word-phrase relationships. Science, 143, 264-265. (E) (X) (MI) (PA) (SO) (SY)
Hyman, M. (1952) An experimental study of sound pressure level and deviation in the speech of cerebral palsied children. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 295-300. (E) (AP) (*)
Hymes, D. H. (1960) Linguistic aspects of studying personality cross-culturally. In Studying personality cross-culturally, ed. by B. Kaplan. New York, Row Peterson. (SO) (TH)
Hymes, D. (1964) Formal discussion. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 107-112. (SO) (SY)
I
Idelberger, H. A. (19—) Hauptprobleme der kinderlieben Sprachentwicklung, nach eigener Beobachtung behandelt. Berlin, H. Walter. [Also in: (1903) Z. pädag. Psychol., 5, 241-297, 425-456.] (G) (FQ) (M) (TH)
Imedadze, N. V. (1960) K psikhologicheskoy prirode rannego dvuyazychiya. Vopr. psikhol, 6(1), 60-68. (GE) (R) (GC-C) (M) (ML) (SY)
Ingram, T. T. S. (1959) A description and classification of the common disorders of speech in children. Arch. Dis. Childh., 34, 444-455. (PD) (SD) (TH) (*)
Ingram, T. T. S., & Reid, J. F. (1956) Developmental aphasia observed in a department of child psychiatry. Arch. Dis. Childh., 31, 161-172. (E) (A) (LP) (SC) (SD) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1941a) The profile as a visual device for indicating central tendencies in speech data. Child Develpm 12, 111-120. (E) (FQ) (ME) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1941b) Research on speech sounds for the first six months of life. Psychol Bull, 38, 277-285. (E) (BB) (CR) (FQ) (PH)
Irwin, O. C. (1942a) The developmental status of speech sounds of ten feeble-minded children. Child Develpm., 13, 29-39. (E) (BB) (FQ) (MR) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1942b) The speech sound status of a small group of low-grade feeble-minded children. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 49, 449. (E) (FQ) (MR) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1945) Reliability of infant speech sound data. J. speech Disord., 10, 227-235. (E) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1946) Infant speech equations for consonant-vowel ratios. J. speech Disord., 11, 177-180. (E) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1947a) Development of speech during infancy: Curve of phonemic frequencies. J. exp. Psychol., 37, 187-193. (E) (BB) (CR) (FQ) (PH)Irwin, O. C. (1947b) Infant speech: Consonant sounds according to the manner of articulation. J. speech Disord., 12, 402-404. (E) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1947c) Infant speech: Consonant sounds according to the place of articulation. J. speech Disord12, 397-401. (E) (FQ) (PH)
Irwin, O. C. (1948a) Infant speech: The effect of family occupational status and of age on sound frequency. J. speech hear. Disord., 13, 320-323. (E) (FQ) (PH) (SO) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1948b) Infant speech: The effect of family occupational status and of age on use of sound types. J. speech hear. Disord., 13, 224-226. (E) (FQ) (PH) (SO) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1948c) Infant speech: Speech sound development of sibling and only infants. J. exp. Psychol, 38, 600-602. (E) (FQ) (PH) (SO) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1949) Infant speech. Sci. Amer., 18, 22-24. (E) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1951) Infant speech: Consonantal position. J. speech hear. Disord 16, 159-161. (E) (FQ) (PH) (X)Irwin, O. C. (1952) Speech development in the young child: 2. Some factors related to the speech development of the infant and young child. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 269-279. (E) (A) (FQ) (MR) (PH) (SX) (X) (CR)Irwin, O. C. (1955a) Phonetic equipment of spastic and athetoid children. J. speech hear. Disord., 20, 54-57. (E) (AP) (FQ) (PH) (X)
Irwin, O. C. (1955b) Phonetic speech development in cerebral palsied children. Amer. J. phys. Med., 34, 325-334. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1956a) Correct status of a set of six consonants in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 17, 148-150. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1956b) A second study on substitution and omission errors in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 17, 109. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1956c) Substitution and omission errors in the speech of children who have cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 17, 75. (E) (AP) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1957a) Correct status of a third set of consonants in the speech of cerebral palsied children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 18(3), 17-20. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1957b) Word equipment of spastic and athetoid children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 18(1), 15-16. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1958) Correct status of initial double consonant blends in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 19(6), 6-13. (E) (AP) (PH) (SX) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1959a) Correct status of final double consonant blends in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 20(3), 10-12. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1959b) A fifth short consonant test for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 20(2), 7-9. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (X) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1959c) A sixth short consonant test for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 20(2), 13-16. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1959d) Substitutions and omissions of initial double consonant blends in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 20(2), 10-12. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1960a) Correct articulation of ten difficult consonants by children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 21(1), 6-7. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1960b) Correct status of vowels in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 21(5) 6-7, 11-12. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1960c) Infant speech: Effect of systematic reading of stories. J. speech hear. Res., 3, 187-190. (E) (FQ) (PA) (PH) (SO) (X)
Irwin, O. C. (1960d) A short diphthong test for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 21(6), 9-10. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1960e) A short vowel test for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 21(4), 3-4. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1961a) Comparison of articulation scores of children with cerebral palsy and mentally retarded children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(4), 10-12. (E) (AP) (ME) (MR) (PD) (PH)
Irwin, O. C. (1961b) Correct status of diphthongs in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(1), 4-5. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1961c) Correct status of vowels and consonants in the speech of children with cerebral palsy as measured by an integrated test. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(3), 21-24. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1961d) Difficulties of consonant and vowel sounds in the speech of children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(5), 14-15. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1961e) A manual of articulation testing for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22, 3-24. (E) (ME) (PD)
Irwin, O. C. (1961f) A short articulation test of ten consonants for use with cerebral palsy children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(2), 28-31. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1961g) Standardization of a test of final double reversed consonant blends for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(4), 12-14. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1961h) Verification of results obtained with an integrated articulation test for use with children with cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 22(5), 8-13. (E) (AP) (ME) (PD) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1962) A second comparative study of articulation of children with cerebral palsy and mentally retarded children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 23(1), 17-19. (AP) (E) (ME) (MR) (PD) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (1963a) The applicability of an articulation test with mentally retarded children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., Jan., 24, 3-8. (E) (ME) (MR) (PD)Irwin, O. C. (1963b) A note on the comparison of articulation of children with cerebral palsy who were given mental tests and those who were not. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 24, 15. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C. (19—) Phonetical description of speech development in childhood. Manual of Phonetics, 6(7), 403-425. (E) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C., & Chen, H. P. (1941) A reliability study of speech sounds observed in the crying of newborn infants. Child Develpm., 12, 351-368. (E) (CR) (FQ) (*)
Irwin, O. C., & Chen, H. P. (1943) Speech sound elements during the first year of life: A review of the literature. J. speech Disord., 8, 109-121. (E) (BB) (CR) (FQ) (PH) (RL)
Irwin, O. C., & Chen, H. P. (1946a) Development of speech during infancy: Curve of phonemic types. J. exp. Psychol., 36, 431-436. (E) (BB) (CR) (FQ) (PH) (*)
Irwin, O. C., & Chen, H. P. (1946b) Infant speech: Vowel and consonant frequency. J. speech Disord., 11, 123-125. (E) (BB) (CR) (FQ) (PH)
Irwin, O. C., & Curry, T. (1941) Vowel elements in the crying vocalization of infants under ten days of age. Child Develpm., 12, 99-109. (E) (CR) (FQ) (PH)
Irwin, O. C., & Hammill, D. D. (1965) A comparison of sound discrimination of mentally retarded and cerebral palsied children: Form A. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 26, 3-6. (E) (ME) (MR) (PH) (SP)
Irwin, O. C., & Jensen, P. J. (1963a) A parallel test of sound discrimination for use with cerebral palsied children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., Sept., 24, 3-10. (E) (ME) (PH) (SP) (SX)
Irwin, O. C., & Jensen, P. J. (1963b) A test of sound articulation for use with cerebral palsied children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., March, 24, 5-11. (E) (ME) (PH) (SP)
Irwin, O. C., & Weiss, L. A. (1934) The effect of clothing on the general and vocal activity of the newborn infant. Univer. Iowa Stud. child Welfare, 9(4), 149-162. (CR) (*)
Irwin, R. B., & Musselman, B. W. (1962) A compact picture articulation test. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 36-39. (E) (ME) (PH) (X)
J
Jäger, G. (1867) Über den Ursprung der menschlichen Sprache. Das Ausland, 935, 1046, 1118. (TH) (*)
Jähner, D. (1931) Das Kind als Sprachschöpfer. Muttersprache, 46, Cols. 119-121. (G) (BG) (M) (*)
Jakobson, R. (1939) Le développement phonologique du langage enfantin et les cohérences correspondantes dans les langues du monde. In 5-me Cong. Internatl Ling., Résumés des Communications. Bruges. (RL) (PH) (TH) (*)
Jakobson, R. (1941) Kindersprache, Aphasie und allgemeine Lautgesetze. Uppsala, Almqvist & Wiksell, [Also in: (1962) Selected writings: Vol. 1. Phonological Studies, 328-401. The Hague, Mouton.] (A) (BB) (CR) (PH) (RL) (TH)
Jakobson, R. (1949) Les lois phoniques du langue enfantin et leur place dans la phonologie générale. In Principes de phonologie, ed. by N. S. Troubetzkoy, 367-379. Paris, Klincksieck. [Also in: (1962) Selected writings: Vol. 1. Phonological studies. The Hague, Mouton.] (A) (BB) (BI) (CR) (PH) (RL) (TH)
Jakobson, R. (1962) Why “mama” and “papa”? In Selected writings, 538-545. The Hague, Mouton. (PH) (TH)
Jakobson, R., & Halle, M. (1956) Fundamentals of language. The Hague, Mouton. (PH) (TH)
Janaček, G. (1947) Obecna didaktika mateřskeho jazyka, 38-94. Prague. (CZ) (FW) (GC) (SY)
Janko, J. (1938) Několik postřehu z vyvoje česke dětské mluvý. Časopis pro moderni filol, 24, 129-134, 451-466. (CZ) (FW) (GC)
Janko, J. (1939) Gibt es Lautgesetze? Časopis pro moderni filol., 25, 216. (CZ) (PH)Jann, G. R., Ward, M. M., & Jann, H. W. (1964) A longitudinal study of articulation, deglutition, and malocclusion. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 424-435. (E) (AP) (BG) (PH) (*)
Jegi, J. I. (1901) The vocabulary of a two-year-old child. Child Study Monthly, 6, 241-261. (E) (BG) (PH) (V) (*)
Jenkins, E., & Lohr, F. E. (1964) Severe articulation disorders and motor ability. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 286-292. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Jenkins, F. (1915) A test of the ability of children to use language forms. 48 J. educ. Psychol, 6, 335-344. (ME) (*)
Jenkins, J. J., & Palermo, D. S. (1964) Mediation processes and the acquisition of linguistic structure. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 141-169. (TH)
Jensen, A. R., & Rohwer, W. O., Jr. (1965) Syntactic mediation of serial and paired-associate learning as a function of age. Child Develpm., 36, 601-608. (E) (X) (SY)
Jersild, A. T., & Ritzmann, R. (1938) Aspects of language development: The growth of loquacity and vocabulary. Child Develpm., 9, 243-259. (E) (X) (FQ) (V) (*)
Jespersen, O. (1904) Phonetische Grundfragen. Leipzig. (AP) (PH) (*)
Jespersen, O. (1916) Nutidssprog hos børn og voxne. Copenhagen/Kristiana, Gyldendal. [2nd ed.: (1923) Børnesprog: En bog for œldre: 2. Ændrede udgave af “Nutidssprog hos börn og voxne.” Copenhagen/Kristiana, Gyldendal.] [Transl.: (1922) Language, its nature, development, and origin. London, Allen/New York, Holt.] [Ger. transl.: (1925) Die Sprache; ihre Natur, Entwicklung und Entstehung. Heidelberg, Winter.] (DA) (BG) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (SS) (SY) (V)
Jespersen, O. (1941) Sproget: Barnet, kvinden, slægten. Acta Linguistica. (DA) (*)
Jespersen, O. (19—) Randnoter til “Nutidssprog hos børn og voxne.” Nord. Tidskrift Filol, 4. Ser., 5. Vol., 127-149. (DA) (*)
Johansson, R. (1965) Sentence length: A quantitative study of the language of six-year-old children. Pedag. Forsk., 2, 80-92. (ME) (*)
John, V. (1963) The intellectual development of slum children: Some preliminary findings. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 33, 813-822. (E) (X) (DI) (SO) (TH) (V)
John, V., & Goldstein, L. (1964) The social context of language acquisition. Merrill-Palmer Quart., 10, 265-275. (E) (X) (DI) (PA) (SO) (SS) (TH) (V)
Johnson, G. B., Jr. (1953) Bilingualism as measured by a reaction-time technique and the relationship between a language and a non-language intelligence quotient. J. genet. Psychol., 82, 3-9. (E) (SP) (ML) (*)
Johnson, H. M. (1928) Children in the nursery school. New York, John Day. (E) (*)
Johnson, W. (1942) A study of the onset and development of stuttering. J. speech Disord., 7, 251-257. (ST)Johnson, W. (1959) The onset of stuttering. Minneapolis, Univer. of Minn. Press. (ST) (*)
Johnson, W., Brown, S. F., Curtis, J. F., Edney, C. W., & Keaster, J. (1948) Speech handicapped school children. New York, Harper, (LP) (PD) (SX) (*)
Johnson, W., Young, M. A., Sahs, A. L., & Bedell, G. N. (1959) Effects of hyperventilation and tetany on the speech fluency of stutterers and non-stutterers. J. speech hear. Res., 2, 203-215. (E) (ST) (X) (*)
Johnson, C. (1896) The world’s baby speech. Fortnightly Rev. (London), New Ser. 60, 494-505. (TH) (*)
Jonasson, S. (1858) Om en sproglaverske. Dansk Maanedsskrift, 8, 158-164. (IC) (BG) (IL) (TW)
Jones, M. H., & Carterette, E. C. (1963) Redundancy in children’s free reading choices. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 2, 489-493. (E) (X) (FQ) (SY)Jones, W. R. (1952) The language handicap of Welsh-speaking children. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 22, 114-123. (E) (WE) (ML) (X) (*)
Joubert, L. (1578) Question vulgaire: Quel langage parleroit un enfant qui n’auroit jamais suy parler? Avignon. [2nd ed. 1579, Bordeaux.] (TH) (*)
K
Kaczmarek, L. (1953) Kształtowanie sie mowy dziecka. Poznan, Towarzystvo Przyjacioł Nauk. (P) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY)
Kagan, J. (1964) Formal discussion. In The acquistion of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 169-173. (SY) (TH)
Kahane, H., Kahane, R., & Saporta, S. (1958) Development of verbal categories in child language. Internatl J. Amer. Ling., 24, Part 2, 1-65. Bloomington, Ind., Indiana Univer. Res. Cent. Anthrop., Folklore, & Ling. (E) (F) (G) (BG) (GC-A) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (SC) (SS) (SY) (V)Kaindl, R. F. (1898) Aus der ruthenischen Kindersprache. Z. ver. Volkskunde. 8, 320. (RU) (*)
Kainz, F. (1937) Der Ursprung der Sprache. Dtsche. vierteljahrsschrift Literaturwiss. u. Geistesgeschichte, 15, 1-33. (TH) (*)
Kainz, F. (1941) Psychologie der Sprache: Vol. 1. Stuttgart, Enke. (BI) (RL) (TH)
Kainz, F. (1943) Psychologie der Sprache: Vol. 2. Vergleichende-genetische Sprachpsychologie. Stuttgart, Enke. (A) (BB) (CR) (IM) (IN) (LP) (PH) (PP) (SC) (SD) (SS) (SY) (TH)
Kainz, F. (1964) Sprachentwicklung im Kindes- und Jugendalter. Munich, Reinhardt. (RL) (TH)
Kaiser, L. (1954) School kindern spreken. Purmerend. (DU) (AC) (PH) (PS) (SY) (X)
Kalinina, L. G. (1963) Vypolneniye rechevoy instruktzii det’mi vtorogo goda zhizni. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 129, 183-187. (R) (X) (SC)
Kampik, A. (1930) Das Lallen beim taubgeborenen Kinde. Blätter für Taubstummenbildung. (BB) (D) (*)
Kanayev, P. I. (1959) Bliznetzy. Moscow/Leningrad, Akad. Nauk SSSR. (R) (TW) (*)
Kaper, W. (1959) Kindersprachforschung mit Hilfe des Kindes: Einige Erscheinungen der kindlichen Spracherwerbung erläutert im Lichte des vom Kinde gezeigten Interesses für Sprachliches. Groningen, J. B. Wolters. (DU) (HO) (BG) (BI) (FW) (GC) (M) (MI) (PS) (PH) (RL) (SC) (SY) (V)
Kaper, W. (1966) Lässt sich beim noch nicht in die Schule gehenden Kind irgendein “gefühl” für die “Leistung” des Genitivs und der Präpositionen feststellen? Lingua, 16, 40-56. (DU) (BG) (GC-C) (PS-PP)
Kapras, J. (1882) Jak se děti uči mluviti. Učitelske listy (Prague), 16, 627- . (CZ) (BB) (BT) (FW)
Kapras, J. (1939) Státe psychologické a pedagogické. Brno. (CZ) (BB) (BT) (FW)Karelitz, S., Fisichelli, V. R., Costa, J., Karelitz, R., & Rosenfeld, L.(1964) Relation of crying activity in early infancy to speech and intellectual development at age three years. Child Develpm., 35, 769-777. (E) (CR) (X)Karimova, R. Sh. (1956) K voprosu o znachenii osvoyeniya doshkol’nikom elementov grammaticheskogo stroya yazyka dlya razvitiye ego myshleniya. Uch. Zap. Leningr. Gos. Pedag. Inst. im. Gertzena, 112. (R) (M) (SY) (*)
Karlin, I. W., & Strazzulla, M. (1952) Speech and language problems of mentally deficient children. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 286-294. (E) (MR) (X)Karpova, S. N. (1955) Osoznaniye slovesnogo sostava rechi rebenkom doshkol’nogo vozrasta. Vopr. psikhol., 1(4), 43-55. (R) (X) (M) (SY)
Karpova, S. N. (1959) Formirovaniye nachal’nogo analiza rechi u doshkol’nikov. Dokl. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 3(6), 79-82. (R) (X) (M) (SY)Karpova, S. N. (1967) Osoznaniye slovesnogo sostava rechi doshkol’-nikami. Moscow, Moscow Univer. (R) (M) (ME) (SY) (X)
Kasser, E. (1945) The growth and decline of a children’s slang vocabulary at Mooseheart, a self-contained community. J. genet. Psychol., 66, 129-137. (E) (IL) (SO) (*)
Kastein, S. (1951) The different groups of disturbances of understanding language in children. Nerv. Child., 9, 31-42. (E) (BG) (SC) (*)
Katz, J. J. (1966) The philosophy of language. New York, Harper & Row. (TH)
Katz, R. (1934) Gemeinschaftsleben verschiedensprachiger Kinder. Z. Kinderforsch., 42, 321-364. (ML) (SO) (*)
Kaus, M. (1897) Obserwacje nad mowa dziecinnego. Lud. 3. Lvov. (P) (BG) (*)
Kaverina, Ye. K. (1950) O razvitii rechi detey pervykh let zhizni. Moscow, Medgiz. (R) (BG) (X) (SC)
Kean, J. M., &Yamamoto, K. (1965) Grammar signals and assignment of words to parts of speech among young children: An exploration. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 4, 323-326. (E) (X) (PS) (SY)
Keber, A. (1868) Zur Philosophie der Kindersprache. Halle. [2nd ed. 1890.] (G) (M) (*)
Keeler, W. R. (1958) Autistic patterns and defective communication in blind children with retrolental fibroplasia. In Psychopathology of communication, ed. by P. H. Hoch & J. Zubin. New York, Grune & Stratton. (BL) (*)
Keilhacker, M. (1933) Beobachtungsbogen über sprachliche Entwicklung im Schulalter. Z. pädag. Psychol., 34, 286-289. (G) (*)
Keilhacker, M. (1947) Winke zu sprachpsychologischen Beobachtungen an Schulkindern. Z. für Phon., 1, 82. (ME) (*)
Kelkar, A. L. (1964) Review of Language in the crib, by R. H. Weir. Word, 20, 98-101. (E) (BB) (FQ) (GC) (M) (PH) (SY) (V)
Keller, H. (1904) The story of my life. Garden City, N. Y., Doubleday, Page. [New ed. 1922.] (E) (BG) (DB)
Kelley, K. L. (1967) Early syntactic acquisition. Unpubl. doct. dissert., UCLA. [Also in: RAND Corp., Publ. P-3719, 1967. Santa Monica, Calif.] (SS) (SY) (TH)
Kellmer Pringle, M. L., & Tanner, M. (1958) The effects of early deprivation on speech development: A comparative study of four year olds in a nursery school and in residential nurseries. Lang. & Speech, 1, 269-287. (E) (SO) (SY) (V) (*)
Kendler, T. S. (1964) Verbalization and optional reversal shifts among kindergarten children. J. verb. Learn. verb. Behav., 3, 428-436. (E) (FQ) (SC) (X)Kenyeres, E. (1926) A gymerek elsó szavai és a szófajok föllépése. Budapest. [A Kisdednevéles kiadása]. (H) (BG) (FW) (PS) (V) (*)
Kenyeres, E. (1927) Les premiers mots de l’enfant et l’apparition des especies de mots dans son langage. Arch. Psychol20, 191-218. (H) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PS) (V)Kenyeres, E. (1938) Comment une petite Hongroise de sept ans apprend le français. Arch. Psychol. (Geneva), 26, 521-566. (H) (F) (BG) (ML) (*)
Keppel, G. (1964) Verbal learning in children. Psychol. Bull., 61, 63-80. (RL) (SS)
Kern, E. (1930) Vergleichende Analyse des Sprachwerdens beim vollsinningen und taubstummen Kinde. Blätter für Taubstummenbildung. (D) (*)
Kernan, K. T., & Blount, B. G. (1966) The acquisition of Spanish grammar by Mexican children. Anthrop. Ling., 8(9), 1-14. (S) (X) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (PS-N) (PS-V)
Keys, N., & Boulware, L. (1938) Language acquisition by deaf children as related to hearing loss and age of onset. J. educ. Psychol., 29, 401-412. (D) (*)
Kido, M. (1931) Zidôgo no hyogen keitai ni tuite.Kyoikusinri Kenkyu, 6. (J) (*)
Kirk, S. A., & McCarthy, J. J. (1961) The Illinois Test of Psycholinguistic Abilities: An approach to differential diagnosis. Amer. J. mental Deficiency, 66, 399-412. (ME) (MR) (*)
Kirkpatrick, E. A. (1891a) How children learn to talk.—A study in the development of language.—Children’s vocabularies. Science, 18, 175- . (E) (PH) (V) (*)
Kirkpatrick, E. A. (1891b) The number of words in an ordinary vocabulary. Science, 18, 107- . (V) (*)
Kirkpatrick, E. A. (1916) Fundamentals of child study: A discussion of instincts, trends, and other factors in human development with practical applications. New York, Macmillan. [2nd ed. 1918.] (E) (PH) (SY) (*)
Kiterman, B. (1913) Opyt izucheniya slogovoy elizii v detskom yazyke. Russ. filol. vestnik, 69. (R) (PH) (*)
Klima, E. S., & Bellugi, U. (1966) Syntactic regularities in the speech of children. In Psycholinguistics papers: The proceedings of the 1966 Edinburgh conference, ed. by J. Lyons & R. J. Wales, 183-208. Edinburgh, Edinburgh Univer. Press. (E) (BG) (M) (NG) (PS-V) (Q) (SY)Klinger, H. (1962) The forum: Initiated English cleft palate speech in a normal Spanish-speaking child. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 379-381. (E) (S) (AP) (BG) (ML) (PD)
Koch, H. L. (1954) The relation of “primary mental abilities” in five- and six-year-olds to sex of child and characteristics of his sibling. Child Develpm., 25, 209-223. (E) (SC) (SX) (*)
Koch, H. L. (1956) Sibling influence on children’s speech. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 322-328. (E) (PH) (SO) (ST) (SX) (X)
Kolarič, R. (1959) Slovenski otroški govor. Godišnjak Filozofskog fakulteta, Novi Sad, Yugoslavia. (SL) (*)
Kol’tzova, M. M. (1949) O vozniknovenii i razvitii vtoroy signal’noy sistemy u rebenka. Trudy Fiziol. Inst. im. I. P. Pavlova, 4, (R) (SS) (X) (*)
Kol’tzova, M. M. (1956) Sravnitel’naya rol’ razlichnykh analizatorov v razvitii obobshchayushchego deystviya slova u rebenka. Vopr. psikhol., 2(4). (R) (SS) (TH) (X) (RS)
Kol’tzova, M. M. (1958) O formirovanii vysshey nervnoy deyatel’nosti rebenka. Leningrad, Medgiz. [Ger. transl.: Kolzowa, M. M. (1960) Die Bildung der höheren Nerventätigkeit des Kindes. Berlin, VEB Verlag Volk u. Gesundheit.] (R) (AP) (X) (RS) (SC) (SS)
Kol’tzova, M. M. (1967) Obobshcheniye kak funktziya mozga. Leningrad, Nauka. (R) (AP) (ME) (SS) (TH) (X)
Konishi, T. (1958a) Linguistic development of children–Kenji. [In Japanese.] Med. Sch. J., Osaka Municipal Coll., 7, 673-679. (J) (*)
Konishi, T. (1958b) Linguistic development of children—Minako. [In Japanese.] Med. Sch. J., Osaka Municipal Coll., 7, 1395-1399. (J) (*)
Konishi, T. (1958c) Linguistic development of children—Shuichi. [In Japanese.] Med. Sch. J., Osaka Municipal Coll., 7, 1357-1362. (J) (*)
Konishi, T. (1959) Linguistic development of children—Toshio. [In Japanese.] Med. Sch. J., Osaka Municipal Coll., 8, 290-294. (J) (*)
Konishi, T. (1960) On the development of language in infants. [In Japanese.] Jap. J. Child Psychiat., 1(1), 62-74. (J) (BB) (M) (PH) (PS) (SY) (A) (V) (BG) (*)
Korovin, K. G. (1950) Postroyeniye predlozheniya v pis’mennoy rechi tugoukhikh detey. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (D) (SY) (*)
Kostyuchek, N. S. (1967) Razvitiye rechi uchashchikhsya shkol slepykh (1-4 klassy). Moscow, Prosveshcheniye. (R) (BL) (M) (RL) (SC) (SS) (SY) (V)Kowalski, S. (1956) Przycznek do zagadnien faz rozwóju myślenia i języka dziecka. Zeszyty Nauk. Univer. im. A. Mickiewicza w Poznaniu, 1. (P) (SS) (*)
Kowalski, S. (1962) Rozwój mowy i myślenia dziecka. Warsaw. (P) (*)
Krasnogorskiy, N. I. (1952) K fiziologii stanovleniya detskoy rechi. Zh. vyssh. nervn. deyat., No. 4, 474-481. (AP) (TH) (*)
Kratocnvil, R. (1924) Vady řeči. Bratislava. (CZ) (PD)
Krehbiel, T. E. (1941) Speech sounds of infants: The fourth, fifth and sixth months. Unpubl. mast, dissert., State Univer. Iowa. (CR) (*)
Kroeber, A. L. (1916) The speech of a Zuñi child. Amer. Anthropologist, New Ser., 18, 529-534. (AI) (Z) (BG) (*)
Kronwall, E. L., & Diehl, C. F. (1954) The relationship of auditory discrimination to articulatory defects of children with no organic impairment. J. speech hear. Disord19, 335-338. (E) (PD) (X)
Krötzsch, W. (1910) Material zur Untersuchung der sprachlichen Entwicklung des Kindes: nach fortlaufenden Beobachtungen zusammengestellt. Z. exp. Pädag., 11, 164-193. (G) (BG) (*)
Kubo, Y. (1922) Yôzi no gengo no hattatu. Transact. Inst. Child Study (Tokyo), 6. (J) (*)
Kuo, H. H. (1937) A study of the language development of Chinese children. [In Chinese.] Chinese J. Psychol., 1, 334-364. (C) (*)
Kussmaul, A. (1877) Die Störungen der Sprache: Versuch einer Pathologie der Sprache. In Handbuch der speziellen Pathologie und Therapie, ed. by H. von Ziemssen. Leipzig. [4th ed. 1910.] (LP) (*)
L
Labov, W. (1965a) Linguistic research on the non-standard English of Negro children. New York, N. Y. Soc. Exp. Study Educ. (E) (SO) (*)
Labov, W. (1965b) Stages in the acquisition of standard English. In Social dialects and language learning, ed. by R. W. Shuy, 77-103. Champaign-Urbana, Ill., Natl Counc. Teachers of Eng. (E) (DI) (PH) (SO)
La Brant, L. L. (1933) A study of certain language developments of children in grades four to twelve inclusive; from the Department of Educational Psychology of Northwestern University. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 14, 387-491. (E) (SY) (*)
La Brant, L. L. (1934) Changing sentence structure of children. Elem. Eng. Rev., 11, 59-65. (E) (SY) (*)
La Civita, A. F., Kean, J. M., & Yamamoto, K. (1966) Socio-economic status of children and acquisition of grammar. J. educ. Res., 60, 71-74. (E) (X) (M) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SO) (SY)
Lamson, M. S. (1878) Life and education of Laura Dewey Bridgman. (E) (BG) (DB) (*)
Landreth, C. (1940) Consistency of four methods of measuring one type of sporadic emotional behavior [crying] in nursery school children. J. genet. Psychol., 57, 101-118. (CR) (ME) (*)
Lange, G., & Neuhaus, W. (1934) Die Strukturwandel der Kindersprache während der Zeit vom 6. bis 9. Lebensjahr. Arch. ges. Psychol., 91, 200-228. (G) (SY) (*)
Langenbeck, M. (1915) A study of a five-year-old child. Pedag. Seminary, 22, 65-88. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Langeveld, M. J. (1950) Algemeen geestelijke ontwikkeling en taalontwikkeling in de puberteit. Verkennign en Verdieping (Purmerend), 70-78. (TH)
Langeveld, M. J. (1960) Ontwikkelingspsychologie: Beknopte historische en systematische inleiding. Groningen. [4th rev. ed.] (TH)
Langeveld, M. J. (1963) Review of Kindersprachforschung mit Hilfe des Kindes: Einige Erscheinungen der kindlichen Spracherwerbung erläutert im Lichte des vom Kinde gezeigten interesses für Sprachliches, by W. Kaper. Lingua, 12, 100-101. (PA) (SC) (SY) (*)
Lantz, D., & Lenneberg, E. H. (1966) Verbal communication and color memory in the deaf and hearing. Child Develpm., 37, 765-779. (E) (D) (SS) (X)Larsen, V. (1938) Lilly: Bogen om den blinde-dovstumme pige. Frederica. (DA) (BG) (DB) (*)
Latif, I. (1934) The physiological basis of linguistic development and of the ontogeny of meaning. Psychol Rev., 41, 55-85, 153-176, 246-264. (AP) (TH) (*)
Lawton, D. (1963) Social class differences in language development: A study of some samples of written work. Lang. & Speech, 6, 120-143. (E) (SO)Lawton, D. (1964) Social class differences in group discussions. Lang. & Speech, 7, 183-204. (E) (DI) (PS-A) (PS-AV) (PS-P) (PS-V) (SO) (SY)Lazurus, M. (1856-57) Das Leben der Seele in Monographien über seine Erscheinungen und Gesetze. 2 vols. [3rd ed. 1883-1897, 3 vols.] (TH) (*)
Lebzelter, V. (1936) Zur Kindersprache der Ondonga, Arboland, Südwestafrika. Anthropos, 31, 578-580. (AF) (*)
Le Dantec, F. (1899) Le méchanisme de l’imitation. Rev. Phil, 10, (IM) (*)
Lee, L. L. (1966) Developmental sentence types: A method for comparing normal and deviant syntactic development. J. speech hear. Disord., 31, 311-330. (E) (ME) (MR) (PP) (SD) (SY) (TH) (X)
Lees, R. (1964) Formal discussion. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 92-98. (SY) (TH)Leith, W. R., & Steer, M. D. (1958) Comparison of judged speech characteristics of athetoids and spastics. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 19(1), 15-20. (E) (AP) (PH) (SX) (X) (*)
Lemaître, A. (1902) Le langage intérieur chez les enfants. L’education, 38. [Sep. ed., Lausanne, 1902.] (TH) (*)
Lemaître, A. (1905) Observations sur le langage intérieur des enfants. Arch. Psychol, 4, 1-43. (TH) (*)
Lemert, E. M. (1962) Stuttering and social structure in two Pacific societies. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 3-10. (J) (SA) (SO) (ST) (TH) (PN)
Lemoine, A. (1865) De la physionomie et de la parole. Paris/New York, Bailliere. (TH) (*)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1957) A probabilistic approach to language learning. Behav. Sci., 2, 1-12. (SS) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1960) Language, evolution, and purposive behavior. In Culture in history: Essays in honor of Paul Radin, ed. by S. Diamond, 869-893. New York, Columbia Univer. Press. (AP) (MR) (MU) (RL) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1962a) A laboratory for speech research at the Children’s Hospital Medical Center. New Eng. J. Med., 266, 385-392. (AC) (CR) (ME) (PH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1962b) Understanding language without ability to speak: A case study. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol., 65, 419-425. (E) (AP) (BG) (MU) (SC) (SY) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1964a) A biological perspective of language. In New directions in the study of language, ed. by E. H. Lenneberg, 65-88. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (AP) (MR) (MU) (RL) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1964b) The capacity for language acquisition. In The structure of language: Readings in the philosophy of language, ed. by J. A. Fodor & J. J. Katz, 579-603. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall. (AP) (MR) (MU) (RL) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1964c) How babies learn to talk. Parents Mag., 39(9), 120. (AP) (FW) (LP) (MR) (SC) (SD) (SO)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1964d) Language disorders in childhood. Harvard educ. Rev., 34, 152-177. (AP) (CR) (D) (LP) (MR) (MU) (PP) (RL) (SD)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1964e) Speech as a motor skill with special reference to nonaphasic disorders. In The acquisition of language, ed. U. Bellugi & R. W. Brown, 115-139. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1). (E) (X) (AC) (AP) (CR) (MR) (MU) (PH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1967a) Biological foundations of language. New York, Wiley. (AC) (AP) (BB) (CR) (D) (MR) (MU) (PD) (RL) (SC) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H. (1967b) Discussion of Chomsky’s “General properties of language.” In Brain mechanisms underlying speech and language, ed. by C. H. Millikan & F. L. Darley. New York, Grune & Stratton. (A) (AP) (TH)
Lenneberg, E. H., Nichols, I. A., & Rosenberger, E. F. (1964) Primitive stages of language development in Mongolism. In Disorders of communication, Vol. 42. Research Publications, A. R. N. M. D. Baltimore, Williams &Wilkins. (E) (IM) (MR) (SY)
Lenneberg, E. H., Rebelsky, F. G., & Nichols, I. A. (1965) The vocalizations of infants born to deaf and to hearing parents. Human Develpm., 8, 23-37. (E) (CR) (PA) (*)
Leont’yev, A. A. (1965) Slovo v rechevoy deyatel’nosti: Nekotoryye problemy obshchey teorii rechevoy deyatel’nosti. Moscow, Nauka. (BI) (RL) (TH)
Leopold, W. F. (1939) Speech development of a bilingual child: A linguist’s record: Vol. 1. Vocabulary growth in the first two years. Evanston, Ill., Northwestern Univer. Press. (E) (G) (BG) (FW) (GC-C) (GG-G) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (ML) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-P) (PS-PP) (PS-V) (V)
Leopold, W. F. (1947) Speech development of a bilingual child: A linguist’s record: Vol. 2. Sound-learning in the first two years. Evanston, Ill., Northwestern Univer. Press. (E) (G) (BG) (FW) (ML) (PH)
Leopold, W. F. (1948a) Semantic learning in infant language. Word, 4, 173-180. (E) (G) (BG) (ML) (SS) (V)
Leopold, W. F. (1948b) The study of child language and infant bilingualism. Word, 4, 1-17. (RL) (ML) (TH)
Leopold, W. F. (1949a) A child’s learning of numerals. Quart. J. Speech, 35, 202-209. (E) (G) (BG) (GC-N) (ML) (N)
Leopold, W. F. (1949b) Original invention in infant language. Symposium, 3, 66-75. (E) (G) (BG) (M) (ML)
Leopold, W. F. (1949c) Speech development of a bilingual child: A linguist’s record: Vol. 3. Grammar and general problems in the first two years. Evanston, Ill., Northwestern Univer. Press. (E) (G) (BG) (FW) (GC-C) (GC-G) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (ML) (PH) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-P) (PS-PP) (PS-V) (SY) (V)
Leopold, W. F. (1949d) Speech development of a bilingual child: A linguist’s record: Vol. 4. Diary from age two. Evanston, Ill., Northwestern Univer. Press. (E) (G) (BG) (FW) (GC-C) (GC-G)(GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (ML) (PH) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-P) (PS-PP) (PS-V) (SY) (V)
Leopold, W. F. (1950) More about numerals. Quart. J. Speech, 36, 85- (E) (G) (BG) (GC-N) (ML)
Leopold, W. F. (1952) Bibliography of child language. Evanston, Ill., Northwestern Univer. Press. (BI)
Leopold, W. F. (1953) Patterning in children’s language. Lang. Learn., 5, 1-14. [Also in: (1961) Psycholinguistics: A book of readings, ed. by S. Saporta, 350-358. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston.] (M) (ML) (PH) (RL) (SS) (SY)
Leopold, W. F. (1954) A child’s learning of two languages. In Report on the 5th Round Table Conference on Linguistics and Language Teaching, ed. by H. J. Mueller. Monogr. Series in Lang. & Ling., No. 7. Washington, D. C., Georgetown Univer. Press. (E) (G) (BG) (ML)
Leopold, W. F. (1964) Review of Language in the crib, by R. H. Weir. Language, 40, 269-273. (E) (M) (PH) (SY) (V) (*)
Lerea, L. (1964) Phonemic analysis-synthesis skills of normal and speech defective children. Psychol Rev., 14, 327-334. (E) (PD) (PH) (SP) (X) (*)
Leroy-Boussion, A. (1965) La fusion syllabique chez les enfants au début de l’apprentissage de la lecture: Inventaire des erreurs auditivo-phonétiques. Neuropsychologia, 3, 153-173. (F) (X) (PH)
Leushina, M. A. (1941) Razvitiye svyaznoy rechi u doshkol’nikov. Uch. zap. Leningr. Pedag. Inst. im. Gertzena, 35, (R) (SY) (*)
Leushina, M. A. (1948) O svoyeobrazii obrazov v rechi malen’kikh detey. Uch. zap. Leningr. Gos. Pedag. Inst. im. Gertzena, 65. (R) (SS) (*)
Leutenegger, R. R. (1951) A bibliography on aphasia. J. speech hear. Disord., 16, 280-292. (A) (BI)
Levina, R. Ye. (1940) Nedostatki chteniya i pis’ma u detey. Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (PD) (PH) (*)
Levina, R. Ye. (1951) Opyt izucheniya negovoryashchikh detey (alalikov). Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (LP) (SD) (*)
Levina, R. Ye., Ed. (1961) Shkola dlya detey s tyazhelymi narusheniyami rechi. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (LP) (M) (PH) (PS-PP) (SC) (SD) (ST) (SY)
Levinson, B. M. (1960) A comparative study of the verbal and performance ability of monolingual and bilingual native born Jewish preschool children of traditional parentage. J. genet. Psychol, 97, 93-112. (E) (Y) (ML) (SO) (SX) (*)
Levonevskiy, A. (1909) Materialy k voprosu o psikhicheskom razvitii rebenka (v techeniye 3 let). Russ. shk., No. 3. (R) (BG) (*)
Levonevskiy, A. (1911) Materialy k voprosu o psikhicheskom razvitii rebenka (v techeniye 3 let). Russ. shk., No. 5-6. (R) (BG) (*)
Levonevskiy, A. (1912) Materialy k voprosu o psikhicheskom razvitii rebenka (v techeniye 3 let). Russ. shk., No. 5-6, 7-8. (R) (BG) (*)
Lewis, M. M. (1936a) The infant’s approach to the forms of adult speech. Speech, 1(3), 7-9. (E) (BG) (PH) (*)
Lewis, M. M. (1936b) Infant speech: A study of the beginnings of language. London, Kegan Paul/New York, Harcourt Brace. (E) (BG) (FW) (FQ) (PS) (SS) (V)
Lewis, M. M. (1937) The beginning of reference to past and future in a child’s speech. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 7, 39-56. (E) (BG) (GC-T) (PS-V) (V)
Lewis, M. M. (1938) The beginning and early functions of questions in a child’s speech. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 8, 150-171. (E) (Q) (SO)
Lewis, M. M. (1963) Language, thought and personality in infancy and childhood. New York, Basic Books. (AC) (BB) (CR) (D) (FW) (IM) (IN) (M) (PA) (PH) (RL) (SC) (SD) (SP) (SS) (TW)
Ley, A. (1922) Sur l’alexie congénitale. J. Neurol. Psychol. (A) (*)
Ley, A. (1929) Evolution favorable d’un cas d’alexie congénitale avec persistance de l’agraphie, J. Neurol Psychol., 11. (A) (*)
Ley, J. (1929) Un cas d’audi-mutité idiopathique chez des jumeaux monozigotiques. Encéphale. (D) (LP) (TW) (*)
Ley, J. (1930) Les troubles de développement du langage. Rapt. 10-me Cong. Belge Neurol Psychol Liège. [Also in: (1930) J. Neurol Psychiat., 30, 415-457. ] (LP) (*)
Lieber, F. (1851) On the vocal sounds of Laura Bridgman. Smithsonian Contrib. Knowledge, 2. (BB) (CR) (DB) (*)
Liebmann, A. (1901) Agrammatismus infantilis. Arch. Psychiat., 34. (IM) (LP) (*)
Liljegren, S. B. (1938) Zur Theorie über die Entstehung der sogenannten Lallwörter. Anglia, 62, 7-13. (BB) (*)
Lindner, G. (1882) Beobachtungen und Bemerkungen über die Entwicklung der Sprache des Kindes. Kosmos, 6, 321-342, 430-441. (G) (BG) (*)
Lindner, G. (1885) Zum Studium der Kindersprache. Kosmos, 9, 161-173, 241-259. (G) (BG) (*)
Lindner, G. (1898) Aus dem Naturgarten der Kindersprache: Ein Beitrag zur kindlichen Sprach- und Geistesentwicklung in den ersten vier Lebensjahren. Leipzig, Grieben. (G) (BG) (FW) (GC) (IM) (M) (PS) (SC) (V)
Lindner, G. (1906) Neuere Forschungen und Anschauungen über die Sprache des Kindes. Z. Pädag. Psychol Pathol. Hygiene, 7, 337-392. (G) (TH)
Lipman, O., & Bogen, . (1917) Die Entwicklung der grammatischlogischen Functionen. Z. angew. Psychol, 12, 347-371. (G) (GC-C) (PS-PP) (SY) (*)
Liska, J. (1956) Rotacismus. Vlastivědny sbornik. Kosice. (CZ) (PD)
Liska, J. (1957) Poruchy řeči. Bratislava. (CZ) (PD)
Little, M. F., & Williams, H. M. (1937) An analytical scale of language achievement. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare, 13(2), 47-94. (E) (M) (PH) (SY) (*)
Livant, W. P. (1962) Productive grammatical operations: 1. The noun compounding of 5-year-olds. Lang. Learn., 12, 15-26. (E) (X) (IN) (PS-N) (SY)
Loban, W. D. (1963) The language of elementary school children. Natl Counc. Teachers of Eng., Res. Rep. No. 1. Champaign-Urbana, Ill. (E) (FQ) (GC) (M) (ME) (PS) (SO) (SY) (SX) (V)
Löbisch, J. E. (1851) Entwicklungsgeschichte der Seele des Kindes. Vienna, Haas. [2nd ed. 1854.] (G) (PH) (*)
Lobsien, M. (1905) Ein bedeutender Schritt vorwärts in der Psychologie der Kindersprache. Der dtsche. Schulmann, 8, 37- , 95- . (G) (FW) (*)
Lombroso, P. (1894) Saggi di psicologia del bambino. Turin/Rome. (I) (*)
Lorenz, W. (1939) Beobachtungen an der Sprache des Kleinkindes. Das gesprochene Wort, 2(2), 51-53. (G) (*)
Lorge, I., & Chall, J. (1963) Estimating the size of vocabularies of children and adults: An analysis of methodological issues. J. exp. Educ., 32, 147-157. (ME) (RL) (V)
Love, R. J. (1964) Oral language behavior of older cerebral palsied children. J. speech hear. Res., 7, 349-359. (E) (AP) (V) (*)
Lovell, G. D. (1941) Interrelations of vocabulary skills: Commonest versus multiple meanings. J. educ. Psychol., 32, 67-72. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Low, A. A. (1936) Studies in infant speech and thought: Part 1. The development of sentence structure in infancy from the viewpoint of grammar; A quantitative analysis of the continuous speech record of two infants. Ill. Med. Dental Monogr. (Urbana), 1(2). (E) (BG) (SY) (*)
Luchsinger, R. (1940) Die Sprache und Stimme von ein- und zweieiigen Zwillingen in Beziehung zur Motorik und zum Erbcharakter. Arch. Klaus-Stift Vererb. Forsch., 15, 459. (TW) (*)
Luchsinger, R. (1953) Die Sprachentwicklung von ein- und zweieiigen Zwillingen und die Vererbung von Sprachstörungen. Acta Genet. Med. (Roma), 2, 31-48. (LP) (TW) (*)
Luchsinger, R. (1957) Agrammtismus und Dyslalie bei eineiigen Zwillingen. Acta Genet., 6, 247-254. (A) (TW) (*)
Luchsinger, R. (1959) Die Vererbung von Sprach- und Stimmstoerungen. Folia Phoniatrica, 11, 7-64. (AP) (LP) (TW) (*)
Luchsinger, R. (1961) Die Sprachentwicklung von ein- und zweieiigen Zwillingen und die Vererbung von Sprachstörungen in den ersten drei Lebensjahren. Folia Phoniatrica, 13, 66-76. (AP) (LP) (TW) (*)
Lukens, H. T. (1894) Preliminary report on the learning of language. Pedag. Seminary, 3, 424-460. (E) (BG) (PH) (*)
Luria. Listed with Luriya.
Luriya, A. R., Ed. (1927) Rech’ i intellekt v razvitii rebenka: In Eksperimental’noye issledovaniye rechevykh reaktziy rebenka: Vol. 1. Moscow, Akad. komm, vospit. im. N. K. Krupskoy. (R) (MR) (PP) (SO) (SS)
Luriya, A. R., Ed. (1956-58) Problemy vysshey nervnoy deyatel’nosti normal’nogo i anomal’nogo rebenka. 2 vols. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (X) (SC)
Luriya, A. R. (1959) Razvitiye rechi i formirovaniye psikhicheskikh protzessov. In Psikhologicheskaya nauka v SSSR, Vol. 1, 516-577. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. [Transl.: (1961) Speech development in the formation of mental processes. In Psychological science in the USSR, Vol. 1, 704-787. Washington, D. C., U.S. Joint Publ. Res. Serv., No. 11466.] (R) (BI) (RL) (RS) (SC) (SO) (SS) (TH)
Luriya, A. R. [Luria] (1961) The role of speech in the regulation of normal and abnormal behavior. Oxford, Pergamon. (X) (SC)
Luriya, A. R., & Yudovich, F. Ya. (1956) Rech’ i razvitiye psikhicheskikh protzessov u rebenka. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. [Transl.: Luria, A. R., & Yudovich, F. Ya. (1959) Speech and the development of mental processes in the child. London, Staples.] (R) (BG) (X) (SC) (SD) (TW)
Lyamina, G. M. (1958) K voprosu o mekhanizme ovladeniya proiznosheniyem slov u detey vtorogo i tret’yego goda zhizni. Vopr. psikhol., 4(6), 119-130. (R) (X) (PH)
Lyamina, G. M. (1960) Razvitiye ponimaniya rechi u detey vtorogo goda zhizni. Vopr. psikhol., 6(3), 106-121. (R) (X) (PH) (SC)
Lyamina, G. M., & Gagua, N. I. (1963) O formirovanii pravil’nogo proiznosheniya slov u detey ot polutory do trekh let. Vopr. psikhol., 8(6), 93-105. [Transl.: (1964) On the formation of correct pronunciation or words in children from one and a half to three years old. Sov. Psychol. & Psychiat., 2(4), 15-27.] (R) (PH)
Lyle, J. G. (1960) Some factors affecting the speech development of imbecile children in an institution. J. Child Psychol. Psychiat., 1, 121-129. (E) (MR) (*)
Lynip, A. W. (1951) The use of magnetic devices in the collection and analysis of the preverbal utterances of an infant. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 44, 221-262. (CR) (ME) (*)
M
Maas, P. (1903) Probleme der Kindersprache. Die Kinderfehler, 8, 221- , 263- .(*)
Mabie, E. (1931) A study of the conversation of first grade pupils during free play periods. J. educ. Psychol., 24, 135-139. (E) (SO) (*)
McCarthy, D. (1929a) A comparison of children’s language in different situations and its relation to personality traits. J. genet. Psychol., 36, 583-591. (E) (SY) (*)
McCarthy, D. (1929b) The vocalization of infants. Psychol. Bull 26, 625-651. (BB) (IM) (RL) (*)
McCarthy, D. (1930) The language development of the pre-school child. Inst. Child Welfare, Monogr. Ser., 4. Minneapolis, Univer. Minn. Press. (E) (PS) (SY) (V)
McCarthy, D. (1931) Language development. In A handbook of child psychology, ed. by C. Murchison, 278-315. Worcester, Mass., Clark Univer. Press. (BI) (RL)
McCarthy, D. (1935) A preliminary report on a new articulation test for young children. Psychol. Bull., 32, 699. (E) (ME) (PH) (*)
McCarthy, D. (1946) Language development in children. In Manual of child psychology, ed. by L. Carmichael. 476-581. New York/London. (BI) (RL)
McCarthy, D. (1952) Organismic interpretation of infant vocalizations. Child Develpm., 23, 273-280. (AP) (BB) (CR) (TH)
McCarthy, D. (1953) Some possible explanations of sex differences in language development and disorders. J. Psychol., 35, 155-160. (LP) (SD) (SX) (*)
McCarthy, D. (1954a) Language development in children. In Manual of child psychology, ed. by L. Carmichael, 492-630. [2nd ed.] New York, Wiley. (BI) (RL)
McCarthy, D. (1954b) Language disorders and parent-child relationships. J. speech hear. Disord 19, 514-523. (LP) (ML) (SD) (ST) (TH)
McCarthy, J. J. (1960) A test for the identification of defects in language usage among young cerebral palsied children. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 21(1), 3-5. (AP) (ME) (*)
McCarthy, J. J., & Kirk, S. A. (1961) Illinois Test of Psycholinguistic Abilities: Examiner’s manual Champaign-Urbana, Ill., Univer. Ill. Press. (ME)
Maccoby, E. E. (1965) Some speculations concerning the lag between perceiving and performing. Child Develpm., 36, 361-367. (SP) (TH)
McCurry, W. H., & Irwin, O. C. (1953) A study of word approximations in the spontaneous speech of infants. J. speech hear. Disord., 18, 133-139. (E) (BB) (PH) (*)
McDonald, E. T., & Baker, H. K. (1951) Cleft palate speech: An integration of research and clinical observation. J. speech hear. Disord., 16, 9-19. (AP) (PD) (*)
MacGinitie, W. (1964) Ability of deaf children to use different word classes. J. speech hear. Res., 7, 141-151. (E) (X) (D) (PS) (SY) (*)
McGinnis, M. A. (1963) Aphasic children: Identification and education by the association method. Washington, D. C., The Volta Bureau. (A) (AP) (BB) (LP) (*)
McGraw, M. B. (1935) Growth: A study of Johnny and Jimmy. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts. (E) (TW)
Machado, y Álvarez, A. (1885-87) Titín: A study of child language. Transac. Philol. Soc., 68-74. London. (S) (BG) (*)
McKee, P. (1937) Vocabulary development. Yearb. Natl Soc. Stud. Educ., 36(1), 277-302. (V) (*)
Macnamara , J., Ed. (1967) Problems of bilingualism. J. soc. Issues, 23(2). (ML)
McNeill, D. (1966a) The creation of language by children. In Psycholinguistics papers: The proceedings of the 1966 Edinburgh conference, ed. by J. Lyons & R. J. Wales, 99-115. Edinburgh, Edinburgh Univer. Press. (E) (J) (BG) (GC-C) (M) (SY) (TH)
McNeill, D. (1966b) Developmental psycholinguistics. In The genesis of language: A psycholinguistic approach, ed. by F. Smith & G. A. Miller, 15-84. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (E) (BG) (X) (GC) (IM) (M) (PA) (PS) (SC) (SY) (TH)
Magni, J. A. (1919) Vocabularies. Pedag. Seminary, 26, 209-233. (RL) (V) (*)
Major, D. R. (1906) First steps in mental growth: A series of studies in the psychology of infancy. New York, Macmillan. (E) (BG) (PH) (V) (*)
Maknen, G. H. (1905) Retarded development of speech in young children. Penn. Med. J., 8, 579-582. (SD) (*)
Mallitzkaya, M. K. (1960) K metodike ispol’zovaniya kartinok dlya razvitiya ponimaniya rechi u detey v kontze pervogo i na vtorom godu zhizni. Vopr. psikhol., 6(3), 122-126. (R) (X) (SC)
Malmberg, B. (1945) Ett barn buter sprak: Drag ur en fyraarig finsk flickas språkliga utveckling. Nordisk Tidskrift, 21, 170-181. (FI) (SW) (BG) (ML) (PH) (*)
Malrieu, P. (1962) Vie sociale et prelangage dans la prèmiere année. J. Psychol, norm, pathol., 59, 139-165. (F) (BB) (CR) (IM) (SC)
Malrieu, P. (1964) Les formes temporelles du verbe chez le jeune enfant. J. Psychol, norm, pathol, 61, 385-404. (F) (GC-T) (PS-V) (X)
Malrieu, P., & Larrue, J. (1967) Langage et personnalité dans la deuxième année. J. Psychol. norm, pathol, 64, 41-71. (F) (BG) (CR) (FW) (IN) (IM) (PS) (SO) (TW)
Maltz, H. E. (1963) Ontogenetic change in the meaning of concepts as measured by the Semantic Differential. Child Develpm., 34, 667-674. (E) (X) (SS)
Mandall, F. (1947) The preliminary standardization and evaluation of a pictorial vocabulary test for young children. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Northwestern Univer. (E) (ME) (V) (*)
Mandell, S., & Sonneck, B. (1935) Phonographische Aufnahme un Analyse der ersten Sprachäusserungen von Kindern. Arch. ges. Psychol., 94, 478-500. (G) (PH) (*)
Mangan, K. R. (1961) Speech improvement through articulation testing. Amer. Ann. Deaf., 106, 391-396. (E) (D) (PH) (*)
Mange, C. V. (1960) Relationship between selected auditory perceptual factors and articulation ability. J. speech hear. Res., 3, 67-74. (E) (PD) (SP) (X) (*)
Mansur, W. (1950) The construction of a picture test for speech sound discrimination. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Boston Univer. (E) (PH) (SP) (*)
Marge, M. (1965) The influence of selected home background variables on the development of oral communication skills in children. J. speech hear. Res., 8, 291-309. (E) (PA) (SO)
Markey, J. F. (1928) The symbolic process and its integration in children: A study in social psychology. London/New York, Harcourt, Brace. (TH) (*)
Markova, A. N. (1957) Formirovaniye obobshchennogo umstvennogo deystviya zvukorazlicheniya. Dokl. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, No. 4. (R) (SP) (*)
Marsden, R. E. (1902) Record from a parent’s note-book. Paidologist, 4, 97-100, 155-159. (E) (BG) (*)
Marshall, H. R. (1961) Relations between home experiences and children’s use of language in play interactions with peers. Psychol. Monogr., 75, No. 5. (E) (SO) (X) (*)
Martin, R. (1962) Stuttering and perseveration in children. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 332-339. (E) (ST) (*)
Massucco Costa, A. (1967) Pensiero, linguaggio e realtà nella psicolinguistica contemporanea. Atti del 25th Cong. Nazionale degli Psicologia Italiani. Florence, Edit. Univer. (TH) (*)
Massucco Costa, A., & Fonzi, A. (1967) Psicologia del linguaggio. Turin, Boringhieri. (I) (*)
Mateer, F. (1908) The vocabulary of a four-year-old boy. Pedag. Seminary, 15,63-74. (E) (BG) (PS) (V) (*)
Matumoto, K. (1932) Zidô no okeru gengo no hattatu, tokuni honpô yôzi no tuite. Kyoiku Kokugokyoiku. Saikinno Sinrigaku to Kokogokyoiku no mondai. (J) (*)
Mauthner, F. (1901) Beiträge zu einer Kritik der Sprache. 3 vols. Stuttgart/Leipzig. (TH) (*)
Maxfield, K. E. (1936) The spoken language of the blind preschool child: A study of method. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Columbia Univer. [Also in: (1936) Arch. Psychol., 29, No. 201.] (BL) (*)
Mayantz, D. M., & Yusevich, Yu. S. (1928) Opyt issledovaniya rechevykh reaktziy detey starshego shkol’nogo vozrasta. In Rech’ i intellekt v razvitii rebenka. Moscow, Akad. komm, vospit. im. N. K. Krupskoy. (R) (V) (X) (*)
Mead, C. D. (1913) The age of walking and talking in relation to general intelligence. Pedag. Seminary, 20, 460-484. (AP) (MR) (*)
Mead, G. H. (1934) Mind, self, and society. Chicago, Univer. Chicago Press. (SO) (TH)
Meadow, K. P. (1968) Early manual communication in relation to the deaf child’s intellectual, social, and communicative functioning. Amer. Ann. Deaf, 113(1), 29-41. (D) (*)
Mecham, M. J. (1957a) Bibliography of publications on speech and hearing in cerebral palsy. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 348-355. (BI) (LP)
Mecham, M. J. (1957b) A scale for screening level of verbal communication behavior in cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 18(4), 22-23. (AP) (ME) (*)
Mecham, M. J. (1960) Measurement of verbal language development in cerebral palsy. Cerebral Palsy Rev., 21(3), 3-4. (E) (A) (AP) (*)
Meijers, J. A. (1962) De taal van het kind. Utrecht. [2nd ed. 1967.] (DU) (D) (ML)
Meillet, A. (1921) Quelques remarques sur les mots français. Bull. Soc. Ling. Paris, 21, 166-168. (F) (PA) (*)
Menchinskaya, N. A. (1957) Razvitiye psikhiki rebenka: Dnevnik materi. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (BG) (FW) (V)
Menyuk, P. (1963a) A preliminary evaluation of grammatical capacity in children. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 2, 429-439. (E) (FQ) (GC) (IM) (RR) (SY) (X)
Menyuk, P. (1963b) Syntactic structures in the language of children. Child Develpm., 34, 407-422. (E) (X) (FQ) (SY) (M)
Menyuk P. (1964a) Alternation of rules in children’s grammar. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 3, 480-488. (E) (FQ) (GC) (M) (SY) (X)
Menyuk, P. (1964b) Comparison of grammar of children with functionally deviant and normal speech. J. speech hear. Res., 7, 110-121. (E) (FQ) (GC) (LP) (RR) (SY) (X)
Menyuk, P. (1964c) Syntactic rules used by children from preschool through first grade. Child Develpm., 35, 533-546. (E) (M) (SY) (X) (FQ)
Meringer, R. (1906) Aus dem Leben der Sprache: Versprechen, Kindersprache, Nachahmungstrieb, Festschrift Universität Graz. [Sep. ed., Berlin, Behr, 1908.] (G) (BG) (IM) (M) (PH) (*)
Messer, S. (1967) Implicit phonology in children. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 6, 609-613. (E) (PH) (X)
Messing, G. M. (1964) Review of Dialogul la copii, by T. Slama-Cazacu. Language, 40, 83-85. (RO) (TH)
Metcalfe, J. (1962) An investigation into certain aspects of speech sound discrimination in children. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Stanford Univer. (E) (X) (PD) (SP)
Métraux, R. W. (1950) Speech profiles of the pre-school child 18-54 months. J. speech hear. Disord., 15, 37-53. (E) (IN) (PD) (RR) (X)
Meumann, E. (1902) Die Entstehung der ersten Wortbedeutungen beim Kinde. Phil. Stud., 20, 152-214. [Sep. ed., Leipzig, Engelmann, 1902.] [2nd ed. 1908.] (G) (SS) (TH)
Meumann, E. (1903) Die Sprache des Kindes. Zürich, Zürcher & Furrer. [Also in: (1903) Abh. Ges. Dṫsche. Sprache in Zürich, 8.] (G) (SS) (TH)
Meumann, E. (1905) Intelligenzprüfungen an Kindern der Volksschule. Z. exp. Pädag., 1, 35-101. (C) (SS) (V) (X) (*)
Meyer, M. P. (1962) Enquête sur le français d’enfants Lausannois. Meppel. (F) (PS-PP) (PS-V) (SY) (V) (X)
Mickens, C. W. (1897-98) Practical results of child study. Child Study Monthly, 3, 198-205. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1961a) Problematika ranog bilingvizma. Pedagoška stvarnost (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 2. (H) (SE) (BG) (ML) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1961b) Neka zapažanja o razvitku govora deteta u dvojezičnoj sredini. Pedagoška stvarnost (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 2. (H) (SE) (BG) (ML) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1964) Adatok a p,b,t,d fonémák kialakulására a gyermeknyelvben. Nyelvtudományi közlemények (Budapest), 66, kötet 2. (H) (PH) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1965a) Glasovni razvoj govora dvojezične dece. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Univer. Novi Sad, Yugoslavia. (H) (SE) (BG) (ML) (PH) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1965b) Interferencija u procesu jednovremenog usvajanja madjarskog i srpskohrvatskog vokalizma. Prilozi proučavanju jezika (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 1. (H) (SE) (BG) (ML) (PH) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1966a) Metoda analize sintaksičkih struktura u dečjem govoru. Prilozi proučavanju jezika (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 2. (ME) (SY)
Mikeš, M. (1966b) Razvitak korelativnog sistema suglasnika. Prilozi proučavanju jezika (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 2. (H) (SE) (BG) (ML) (PH) (*)
Mikeš, M. (1967a) Acquisition des catégories grammaticales dans le langage de l’enfant. Enfance, 20, 291-298. (H) (SE) (BG) (GC-C) (GC-G) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (ML) (SO) (SY)
Mikeš, M. (1967b) Aproche methodologique aux recherches de l’apprentissage du langage par l’enfant. Actes du Xe Congres International des Linguistes, Bucharest. (ME) (SY)
Mikeš, M. (1967c) Glasovna struktura KVKV u razvojnom procesu asocijativnog sistema glasova. Prilozi proučavanju jezika (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 3. (H) (SE) (BG) (PH)
Mikeš, M., & Vlahović, P. (1966) Razvoj gramatičkih kategorija u dečjem govoru. Prilozi proučavanju jezika (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 2. (H) (SE) (BG) (GC-C) (GC-G) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (ML) (SO) (SY)
Milisen, R. (1954) A rationale for articulation disorders. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., 4, 6-17. (PD) (PH) (TH) (*)
Miller, G. A. (1964) The psycholinguists: The new scientists of language. Encounter, 23, No. 130, 29-37. (TH)
Miller, G. A. (1965) Some preliminaries to psycholinguistics. Amer. Psychologist, 20, 15-20. [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 172-180. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Miller, G. A., & Chomsky, N. (1963) Finitary models of language users. In Handbook of mathematical psychology, Vol. 2, ed. by R. D. Luce, R. R. Bush, & E. Galanter, 419-491. New York, Wiley. (SY) (TH)
Miller, G. A., Galanter, E., & Pribram, K. (1960) Plans and the structure of behavior. New York, Holt, Rinehart, & Winston. (TH)
Miller, G. F., Miller, F. D., & Nice, M. M. (1923) A boy’s vocabulary at eighteen months. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 3, 140-144. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Miller, N. E., & Dollard, J. (1941) Social learning and imitation. New Haven, Yale Univer. Press. (TH)
Miller, W. R. (1964a) The acquisition of formal features of language. Amer. J. Orthopsychiat., 34, 862-867. (E) (BG) (X) (HO) (GC-N) (PD) (PH) (PS-N) (SO) (SP) (SY) (TH)
Miller, W. R. (1964b) Patterns of grammatical development in child language. In Proc. 9th Internatl Cong. Ling., ed. by H. G. Lunt, 511-516. The Hague, Mouton. (E) (BG) (GC) (IM) (M) (PH) (SS)
Miller, W. R., & Ervin, S. M. (1964) The development of grammar in child language. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 9-35. (E) (BG) (X) (GC-N) (GC-T) (IM) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY)
Millikan, C. H., & Darley, F. L. (1967) Brain mechanisms underlying speech and language. New York, Grune & Stratton. (A) (AP) (TH)
Mimms, H. A., Kolas, C., & Williams, R. (1966) Lisping and persistent thumb-sucking among children with open-bite malocclusions. J. speech hear. Disord., 31, 176-178. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Minifie, F. D., Darley, F. L., & Sherman, D. (1963) Temporal reliability of seven language measures. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 139-148. (E) (ME) (*)
Mladenov, S. (1934) Einige sprachgeschichtliche Fragen in Prof. Dr. Iv. A. Georgovs Arbeiten über die Entwicklung der Sprache des Kindes. Sofia. (B) (TH) (*)
Moncur, J. P. (1952) Parental domination in stuttering. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 155-165. (E) (ST) (X)
Moncur, J. P. (1955) Symptoms of maladjustment differentiating young stutterers from non-stutterers. Child Develpm., 26, 91-96. (E) (ST) (X)
Moore, J. K. (1947) Speech content of selected groups of orphanage and non-orphanage preschool children. J. exp. Educ., 16, 122-133. (SO) (*)
Moore, J. K. (1964) Comments and conclusions. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 181-184. (SY) (TH)
Moore, K. C. (1895-96) The mental development of a child. Psychol Rev., Monogr. Suppl., 1(3). (E) (BG) (PH) (SY) (V) (*)
Moorhead, P. S., Mellman, W. J., & Wenar, C. (1961) A familial chromosome translocation associated with speech and mental retardation. Amer. J. Hum. Genet., 13, 32-46. (AP) (LP) (MR) (*)
Morgan, W. P. (1896) A case of congenital word-blindness. Brit. med. J., 1896(2), 1378. (A) (*)
Morgenstern, J. J. (1956) Socioeconomic factors in stuttering. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 25-33. (E) (SO) (SY) (X)
Morley, M. (1957) The development and disorders of speech in childhood. London, Livingstone. (A) (AP) (LP) (RL) (SD) (*)
Morley, M., Court, D., & Miller, H. (1954) Developmental dysarthria. Brit. med. J., 1954(1), 8-10. (E) (LP) (PD) (TH) (V) (*)
Morley, M., Court, D., Miller, H., & Garside, R. F. (1955) Delayed speech and developmental aphasia. Brit. med. J., 1955(2), 463-467. (E) (A) (AP) (D) (MR) (SD) (*)
Morozova, N. G. (1953) Ponimaniye i upotrebleniye predlogov glukhonemymi shkol’nikami. In Uchebno-vospitatel’naya rabota v spetzial’-nykh shkolakh. Vol. 2. Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (D) (PS-PP) (SC) (*)
Morris, H. L. (1962) Communication skills of children with cleft lips and palates. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 79-90. (E) (AP) (*)
Morris, H. L., Spriestersbach, D. C., & Darley, F. L. (1961) An articulation test for assessing competency of velopharyngeal closure. J. speech hear. Res., 4, 48-55. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Morrison, C. E. (1914-15) Speech defects in young children. Psychol. Clinic, 8, 138-142. (E) (PD) (*)
Morrison, S. (1955) Measuring the severity of articulation defectiveness. J. speech hear. Disord. 20, 347-351. (E) (ME) (PD) (PH) (*)
Motoyama, E. C. (19–) A study of the growth in vocabulary of young bilingual children of Chinese ancestry before and after a year of kindergarten instruction. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Univer. Hawaii. (C) (E) (ML) (V) (*)
Mowrer, O. H. (1950) On the psychology of “talking birds”–a contribution to language and personality theory. In Learning theory and personality dynamics, 668-726. Ronald Press. (TH)
Mowrer, O. H. (1952) Speech development in the young child: 1. The autism theory of speech development and some clinical applications. J. speech hear. Disord17, 263-268. (TH)
Mowrer, O. H. (1954) The psychologist looks at language. Amer. Psychologist, 9, 660-694. [Also in: (1967) Readings in the psychology of language, ed. by L. A. Jakobovits & M. S. Miron, 6-50. Englewood Cliffs, N. J., Prentice-Hall.] (TH)
Mowrer, O. H. (1958) Hearing and speaking: An analysis of language learning. J. speech hear. Disord., 23, 143-152. (IM) (RS) (TH)
Mowrer, O. H. (1960) Learning theory and the symbolic processes. New York, Wiley. (TH)
Moyer, H. B. (1911) Speech development. Dissert., Univer. Penn. (*)
Mueller, M., & Smith, J. O. (1964) The stability of language age modifications over time. Amer. J. ment. Def., 68, 537-539. (E) (MR) (*)
Mueller, M. W., & Werner, S. J. (1964) Psycholinguistic abilities of institutionalized and non-institutionalized trainable mental retardates. Amer. J. ment. Def., 68, 775-783. (E) (MR) (*)
Mullendore, J. M., & Stondt, R. J., Jr. (1961) Speech patterns of muscular dystrophic individuals. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 252- 257. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X)
Müller, F. (1867-78) Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft. Vienna. (TH) (*)
Muller, M. (1863) Lectures on the science of language. London/Chicago/New York. [Ger. transl.: (1863) Die Wissenschaft der Sprache.] [Fr. transl.: (1867) La science du langage.] (TH)
Muller, M. (1887) The science of thought. [Ger. transl.: (1888) Das Denken im Lichte der Sprache. Leipzig.] (TH)
Murai, J. (1960) Speech development of infants: Analysis of speech by sona-graph. Psychologia, 3, 27-35. (J) (AC) (BB) (CR) (IM) (PH) (*)
Murai, J. (1961) Speech development in early infancy. [In Japanese.] Tetsugakukenkyu, No. 474, 20-42. (J) (PH) (*)
Murata, K. (1961) The development of verbal behavior: 3. Early developmental processes of the linguistic forms and functions of requests. [In Japanese.] Jap. J. educ. Psychol., 9, 220-229. (J) (PS-V) (SY) (*)
Murchison, C., & Langer, S. (1927) Tiedemann’s observations on the development of the mental faculties of children. Pedag. Seminary, 34, 205-230. (G) (BG)
Murray, R. S. (1962) The development of /r/ in the speech of preschool children. Doct. dissert., Stanford Univer. (E) (AC) (PD) (PH) (X) (*)
Musatti, C. L. (1962) Acquisizione del linguaggio. In Problemi del linguaggio: Relazioni e discussione (Roma, 12-14 Aprile 1956), 83-94. Rome, Accad. Nazionale dei Lincei. (TH)
Mussafia, M. (1960) Le rôle de l’hérédité dans les troubles du langage. Folia Phoniatrica, 12, 94-100. (AP) (LP) (*)
Mussafia, M. (1961) Retard “simple” du langage chez des triples. Folia Phoniatrica, 13, 62-65. (SD) (TW) (*)
Myers, P. (1965) A study of language disabilities in cerebral palsied children. J. speech hear. Res., 8, 129-136. (E) (AP) (*)
Mykelbust, H. R. (1954) Auditory disorders in children. New York, Grune & Stratton. (AP) (BB) (D) (SP) (*)
Myklebust, H. R. (1957a) Aphasia in children: Diagnosis and training. In Handbook of speech pathology, ed. by L. E. Travis, 514-530. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts. (A) (AP) (BB) (LP) (*)
Myklebust, H. R. (1957b) Babbling and echolalia in language theory. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 356-360. (A) (BB) (TH)
Myklebust, H. R. (1964) The psychology of deafness. New York, Grune & Stratton. (D) (*)
Mysak, E. D. (1961) Organismic development of oral language. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 377-384. (BB) (TH)
N
Nadoleczny, M. (1926) Die Sprach- und Stimmstörungen im Kindesalter. In Handbuch der Kinderheilkunde, ed. by Praundler & Schlossmann, Vol. 5. Leipzig. [2nd ed.] (LP) (PD) (*)
Nagano, M. (19—) Yoji no gengo hattatsu ni tsuite: Shu to shite joshi no shutoku kotei o chushin ni. Kotoba no kenkyu, 288, 383-396. (PS) (*)
Nakano, Y., Katada, A., Hayashi, K., & Ioa, N. (1960) Language and communication in mentally retarded: A study on the successive reproduction. Jap. J. Child Psychiat., 1, 170-177. (J) (MR) (*)
Nakazima, S. (1962) A comparative study of the speech developments of Japanese and American English in childhood: 1. A comparison of the developments of voices at the prelinguistic period. Stud. phonol., 2, 27-46. (E) (J) (AC) (BG) (CR) (PH)
Naor, M., & Nevekluf, T. (1929) Beiträge zur Kindersprache; 1. Zum Verständnis des universellen Stammeins. Z. Ges. Neurol. Psychiat., 122, 545-550. (ST) (*)
Nausester, W. (1904) Das Kind und die Form der Sprache. Sammlung von Abhandlungen aus dem Gebiete der pädagogischen Psychologie und Physiologie (Berlin), 7. (G) (GC) (M) (SY) (TH) (*)
Nausester, W. (1906) Die grammatische Form der Kindersprache. Z. pädag. Psychol., 8, 214-233. (GC) (M) (SY) (TH) (*)
Nazarov, A. N. (1964) Poryadok slov v pis’mennoy rechi uchashchikhsya. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 136, 221-256. (R) (SY)
Necker de Sanscure, M. (1827) Éducation progressif: Comment les enfants apprennent à parler. (F) (TH) (*)
Nelson, O. W. (1953) An investigation of certain factors relating to the nature of children with functional defects of articulation. J. educ. Res., 47, 211-216. (E) (PD) (*)
Neugebauer, H. (1914) Sprachliche Eigenbildungen meines Sohnes. Z. Kinderforsch., 19, 174-181, 242-246, 360-370. (G) (M)
Neugebauer, H. (1915) Aus der Sprachentwicklung meines Sohnes. Z. angew. Psychol., 9, 298-306. (G) (BG) (M) (V)
Nice, M. M. (1915) The development of a child’s vocabulary in relation to environment. Pedag. Seminary, 22, 35-64. (E) (BG) (FQ) (V)
Nice, M. M. (1915-16) Speech of a left-handed child. Psychol. Clinic, 9, 115-117. (E) (AP) (BG) (SD) (*)
Nice, M. M. (1917) The speech development of a child from eighteen months to six years. Pedag. Seminary, 24, 204-243. (E) (BG) (V)
Nice, M. M. (1918) Ambidexterity and delayed speech development. Pedag. Seminary, 25, 141-162. (AP) (SD) (*)
Nice, M. M. (1920) Concerning all-day conversations. Pedag. Seminary, 27, 166-177. (E) (BG) (FQ) (SY) (V)
Nice, M. M. (1922) A child who would not talk. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 2, 108-111. [Also in: (1925) Pedag. Seminary, 32, 105-142.] (E) (IL) (SD) (V)
Nice, M. M. (1924) The speech development of a little girl. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci, 4, 147-168. (E) (BG) (*)
Nice, M. M. (1925) Length of sentences as a criterion of a child’s progress in speech. J. educ. Psychol, 16, 370-379. (E) (BG) (SY)
Nice, M. M. (1926) A child’s vocabularies from fifteen months to three years. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 6, Part 2, 317-333. (E) (BG) (V)
Nice, M. M. (1926-27) On the size of vocabularies. Amer. Speech, 2, 1-7. (E) (F) (G) (V) (*)
Nice, M. M. (1932) An analysis of the conversation of children and adults. Child Develpm., 3, 240-246. (E) (SO) (*)
Nice, M. M. (1933) A child’s attainment of the sentence. Pedag. Seminary, 42, 216-224. (E) (BG) (SY) (*)
Noble, E. (1888) Child speech, and the law of mispronunciation. Education, 9, 44-52, 117-121, 188-194. (PH) (*)
Noel, D. I. (1953) A comparative study of the relationship between the quality of the child’s language usage and the quality and types of language used in the home. J. educ. Res., 47, 161-167. (PA) (SO) (E) (*)
Norman, E. (1936) Some psychological features of babble. In Proc. 2nd Internatl Cong. Phon. Sci., ed. by D. Jones & D. B. Fry, No. 36, 155-158. London. [Sep. ed. (1936) Cambridge Univer. Press.] (E) (BB) (*)
O
Oakden, E. C., & Sturt, M. (1922) The development of the knowledge of time in children. Brit. J. Psychol., 12, 309-336. (E) (SS) (*)
Oatman, M. E. (1921) A boy’s development at eighteen months. Pedag. Seminary, 28, 52-59. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Oatman, B., & Oatman, M. E. (1922) Further notes on eighteen months’ vocabularies. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 2, 106-108. [Also in: Univer. Okla. Bull., new series, No. 247 (under Blachly, M. E. O.)] (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Oatman-Blachly, M. E. (1923) A comparison of the sizes of vocabularies of five children of the same age. Proc. Okla. Acad. Sci., 3, 151-155. [Also in: Univer. Okla. Bull., new series, No. 271 (under Blachly, M.E.O.)] (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
O’Donnell, R. C., Griffin, W. J., & Norris, R. C. (1967) Syntax of kindergarten and elementary school children: A transformational analysis. Champaign-Urbana, Ill., Natl Counc. Teachers of Eng. (E) (SY) (*)
Oehl, W. (1933) Das Lallwort in der Sprachschöpfung. Freiburg (Switzerland). (BB) (PA) (*)
Ohnesorg, K. (1947a) O /k/a/t/ v řeči dětské. Listy filol., 71, 15-19. (CZ) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1947b) O vývoji dětské řeči a její fonetice. Paedologicke rozhledy, 3, 65-91. (CZ) (PH) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1948a) Fonetická studie o dětské řeči. Prague, Univer. Karlovy. (CZ) (FW) (IN) (PH) (V)
Ohnesorg, K. (1948b) O mluvnim vývoji dítěte. Prague, Prometheus. (CZ) (BB) (BT) (CR) (FW) (IM) (PH) (SC) (SP) (SY)
Ohnesorg, K. (1955a) Kapitola ze sronavaci fonetický dětské řeči. Sbornik praci fil. fakulty Brnenske Univer., A4, 3, 95-101. (CZ) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1955b) Růst slovní Zásoby v dětské řeči. Univer. Carolina (Prague), Philol., 1, 85-107. (CZ) (FW) (GC) (V)
Ohnesorg, K. (1956) Frekvence dyslalii a jejích fonetický výklad. Sbornik československa logopedie (Prague), 100-113. (CZ) (FQ) (PD) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1959a) Druhá fonetická studie o dětské řeči. Prague, Stát. pedag. naklad. (CZ) (FW) (IN) (PH) (V)
Ohnesorg, K. (1959b) Hlásky /f/a/v/ v řeči dětské. Acta Univer. Carolina, Slavica Pragensia, 1, 31-36. (CZ) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1959c) Naše dítě se uči mluvit. Prague. (CZ) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1960a) Jak se děti uči mluvit. Sbornik pred branami školy (Prague), 33-39. (CZ) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1960b) Zvlastnosti dětské vyslovnosti a vývoj hlásek v jazýčich. In Dyslalie, 81-85. Prague. (CZ) (PD) (PH) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1961) Studium mowy dzieciej i opieka nad jej kształtowaniem v czechoslowacji. Biul. fonograficzny, 3, 49-58. (CZ) (BG)
Ohnesorg, K. (1964a) Une contribution à la pédophonétique. Z. Phonetik Sprachwiss. Kommunikationforsch., 17, 265-268. (PH) (RL) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1964b) Hluchonome děti jako námět mussetovy povídky. Otázky defektologie, 6, 195-197. (CZ) (D) (MU)
Ohnesorg, K. (1964c) Opposition sourde/sonore dans le langage enfantin. Bull. Soc. Roumaine Ling. Romane, 1, 76-77. (CZ) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1964d) Renesance studia dětské řeči. Sbornik praci fil Fakulty Brnenske Univer., B9, 228-239. (CZ) (BG)
Ohnesorg, K. (1965a) Étude sur le langage enfantin. Sbornik fil fakulty univer. Komenskeho (Bratislava), 16, Philol A, 19-30. (CZ) (BB) (BT) (CR) (FW) (IM) (PH) (SC) (SP) (SY)
Ohnesorg, K. (1965b) Das Phonem und seine Realisierung in der Kindersprache. Proc. 5th Internatl Cong. Phon. Sci., 441-445. Basel/New York, Karger. (CZ) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1965c) La syllabe et les qualités prosodiques dans le langage enfantin. Misc. Rossetti, 639-643. Bucharest. (CZ) (IN) (PH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1966a) Deformance výslovnosti v uměleckem předesu a dětské dyslalie. Sbornik pracovní vychova defektnich děti, 253-257. Prague. (CZ) (PD) (PH) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1966b) Le langage enfantin et la linguistique générale. Linguistica traditionala şi linguistica structurala, 48-52. Univer. Bucharest. (CZ) (PH) (TH)
Ohnesorg, K. (1966c) Le vers enfantin. Teorie verse (Brno), 1, 55-59. (CZ) (IN) (TH)
Ohwaki, Y. (1928) Honpo zido no gengo hassei. . . Nippon gakazykutu kyokai hokoku (Tokyo), 4, 798-803. (J) (BG) (FQ) (FW) (GC-T) (N) (Q) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SY) (V)
Ohwaki, Y. (1933) Die ersten zwei Jahre der Sprachentwicklung des japanischen Kindes: Ein Beitrag zur Psychologie der Kindersprache. Tohoku psychol Folia, 1, 71-110. (J) (BG) (FQ) (FW) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (SY) (V)
Okamoto, N. (1961) Verbalization process in infancy: 2. Extensive use of sounds in development of communication. 25th Annu. Mtg Jap. Psychol Ass. (J) (BB) (CR) (*)
Okamoto, N. (1962) Verbalization process in infancy: 1. Transpositive use of sounds in development of symbolic activity. Psychologia, 5, 32-40. (J) (CR) (*)
Oléron, P. (1952) Le rôle du langage dans le développement mental: Contribution tirée de la psychologie de l’enfant sourd-muet. Enfance, 5, 120-137. (D) (MU) (TH) (*)
Oléron, P., & Braun, M. M. (1965) Analyse génétique et développement du langage. Psychol. française, 10(1), 70-79. (TH)
Olmsted, D. L. (1966) A theory of the child’s learning of phonology. Language, 42, 531-535. (PH) (TH)
Olson, A. W. (1941) The measurement and analysis of individual differences in fine discriminations of word meanings. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Northwestern Univer. (E) (SS) (V) (*)
Olson, J. L. (1961) Differential diagnosis: Deaf and sensory aphasic children. Except. Child., 27, 422-424. (E) (A) (D) (*)
Olson, W. C., & Koetzle, V. S. (1936) Amount and rate of talking of young children. J. exp. Educ., 5, 175-179. (E) (*)
Ołtuszewski, W. (1889) Aperçu général de pathologie et de thérapeutique des vices de la parole. Arch. Neurol, 42. (LP) (*)
Ołtuszewski, W. (1893) Abriss über die Physiologie der Sprache. Monatsschr. Ges. Sprachheilkunde. [Sep. ed. 1893.] (P) (*)
Ołtuszewski, W. (1896) Die Entwicklung der Sprache bei dem Kinde und das Verhalten derselben zu seiner Intelligenz. Monatsschr. Ges. Sprachheilkunde, 6, No. 5-8. (AP) (*)
Ołtuszewski, W. (1897) Die geistige und sprachliche Entwicklung des Kindes. Berlin, Fischer. (P) (BG) (PH) (*)
Ołtuszewski, W. (1901) Psychologie und Physiologie der Sprache. Berlin. (AP) (TH) (*)
Ombredane, A. (1933) Le langage. In Nouveau traité de psychologie, ed. by G. Dumas. Paris. (BI) (*)
Ombredane, A. (1935) Études sur le langage, sur les prèmieres manifestations du langage enfantin et sur la pretendue loi de Fritz Schultze. Hyg. Ment., 30(4), 69-89. (FW) (TH) (*)
Ombredane, A. (1939) Le développement du langage chez l’enfant. Cahiers Pédag. (F) (*)
Ooishi, H. (1950) Linguistic development of children–Michiko. [In Japanese.] (J) (*)
Oostveen, J. (1937) De ontwikkeling der kinderspraak uit spraak en stemafwijkingen. The Hague, Naef. (DU) (*)
Opie, I., & Opie, P. (1959) The lore and language of school children. Oxford, Clarendon Press. (E) (SO)
Orchinik, C. W. (1958) On tickling and stuttering. Psychoanalyt. Rev., 45, 25-39. (E) (ST) (X) (*)
Orlova, A. M. (1950) Psikhologiya ovladeniya ponyatiyem podlezhashcheye. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 28. (R) (SY) (*)
Orlova, A. M. (1955) K voprosu ob ob”yektivnoy obuslovlennosti tak nazyvayemogo “chut’ya yazyka.” Vopr. psikhol., 1(5), 71-83. (R) (X) (SC) (SY) (MI) (TH)
Orton, S. T. (1915 & 1925) Word-blindness in school children. Arch. Neurol. Psychol. (A) (*)
Orton, S. T. (1930) Familial occurrences of disorders in acquisition of language. Eugenics, 3-4, 140-147. (AP) (LP) (*)
Osgood, C. E. (1953) Method and theory in experimental psychology. New York, Oxford Univer. Press. (TH)
O’Shea, M. V. (1907) Linguistic development and education. London/New York, Macmillan. (E) (BG) (M) (PH) (SY) (*)
Otto, B. (1910) Von der Helga: Ein Buch für junge Eheleute und für Kinderfreunde. Gross-Lichterfelde, Verlag des Hauslehrers. (G) (BG) (*)
P
Pačesová, J. (1959) Contribution a l’étude du langage enfantin. Sbornik praci fil. fakulty Brnenske Univer., A7, 20-30. (CZ) (FW) (PH) (SC) (SP)
Palermo, D. S. (1963) Word associations and children’s verbal behavior. In Advances in child development and behavior, ed. by L. P. Lipsett & C. C. Spiker, Vol. 1, 31-68. New York, Academic Press. (E) (FQ) (PS) (RL) (SS)
Palermo, D. S., & Jenkins, J. J. (1963) Frequency of superordinate responses to a word association test as a function of age. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 1, 378-383. (E) (X) (SS)
Palermo, D. S., & Jenkins, J. J. (1964) Word association norms: Grade school through college. Minneapolis, Minn., Univer. Minn. Press. (E) (X) (FQ) (PS) (V)
Palermo, D. S., & Jenkins, J. J. (1965) Changes in the word associations of fourth- and fifth-grade children from 1916 to 1961. J. verb. Learn. verb. Behav., 4, 180-187. (E) (FQ) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-V) (SS) (V) (X)
Pasamanick, B., Constantinou, F. K., & Lilienfeld, A. M. (1956) Pregnancy experience and the development of childhood speech disorders. Amer. J. Dis. Child, 91, 113-118. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Passy, P. (1937) yn kεstj ãbarasã:t. Le Maître phonétique, 52, 14- . (IM) (PH) (*)
Paul, H. (1880) Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. Halle, Niemeyer. [5th ed. 1920, re-issue 1937.] (M) (PH) (TH) (*)
Pavlova, A. D. (1924) Dnevnik materi. Moscow. (R) (BG) (FW) (GC) (PS) (S) (V)
Pavlovitch, M. (1920) Le langage enfantin: Acquisition du serbe et du français par un enfant serbe. Paris, Champion. (F) (SE) (BG) (ML) (*)
Payne, C. S. (1930) The mispronunciation of words. Pedag. Seminary, 38, 427-444. (PD) (PH) (*)
Peisach, E. C. (1965) Children’s comprehension of teacher and peer speech. Child Develpm., 36, 467-480. (E) (ME) (SC) (SO) (SX) (X) (SY)
Pelsma, J. R. (1910) A child’s vocabulary and its development. Pedag. Seminary, 17, 328-369. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Pendergast, K., Soder, A., Barker, J., Dickey, S., Gow, J., & Selmar, J. (1966) An articulation study of 15,255 Seattle first grade children with and without kindergarten. Except. Child., 32, 541-547. (E) (PD) (PH) (*)
Penfield, W. (1965) Conditioning the uncommitted cortex for language learning. Brain, 88, 797-798. (A) (*)
Penfield, W., & Roberts, L. (1969) Speech and brain mechanisms. Princeton, N. J., Princeton Univer. Press. (A) (AP) (TH)
Perez, B. (1878) Les trois premières années de l’enfant: La psychologie de Venfant, Part 1. Paris, Alcan. [7th ed. 1911.] [Transl.: (1885) The first three years of childhood. Chicago, Marquis/London, Sonnenschein.] (F) (BG) (PH) (*)
Perez, B. (1886) L’enfant de trois à sept ans: La psychologie de l’enfant, Part 2. Paris, Alcan. [3rd rev. ed. 1894.] (F) (*)
Perez, B. (1893) Die Anfänge des kindlichen Seelenlebens. Pädag. Mag., Heft 36. (F) (*)
Perez, B. (1895) Le développement des idées abstraites chez l’enfant. Rev. Phil., 40, 449-467. (SS) (*)
Petrikova-Ryndova, L. (1943) K melodiče dětské mluvy. Slovo a slovesnost, 9, 19-96. (CZ) (IN)
Pfanhauser. See Brenstiern Pfanhauser.
Piaget, J. (1923) Le langage et la pensée chez l’enfant. Neuchatel/Paris. [2nd ed. 1930.] [Transl.: (1926) The language and thought of the child. London, Kegan Paul, Trench & Trubner/New York, Harcourt Brace. [2nd ed. 1932.]] (F) (SO) (TH)
Pick, A. (1916) Über den Sprachreflex als Grundlage der kindlichen und pathologischen Echolalie. Fortschr. Psychol., 4. (IM) (LP) (*)
Pick, A. (1916-17) Zur Frage nach der Natur der Echolalie: Ein Beitrag zum Verständnis des kindlichen Sprechenlernens mit Bemerkungen über die Verwertung des bedingten Reflexes in der Psychologie. Fortschr. Psychol. u. ihrer Anwendungen, 4, 34-42. (A) (BB) (IM) (*)
Pickett, J. M. (1963) Tactual communication of speech sounds to the deaf: Comparison with lip-reading. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 315-330. (E) (D) (*)
Pike, E. G. (1949) Controlled infant intonation. Lang. Learn., 2, 21-24. (E) (X) (IN) (PA) (PH)
Pillsbury, W. B., & Meader, C. L. (1928) The psychology of language. New York, Appleton. (TH)
Pistor, F. (1939) Measuring the time concepts of children. J. educ. Res., 33, 293-300. (E) (ME) (SS) (*)
Ploss, H. H. (1876) Das Kind in Brauch und Sitte der Völker; anthropologische Studien. 2 vols. Stuttgart, A. Auerbach/Leipzig, T. Grieben. [2nd ed. 1884.] (SO) (*)
Pockels, C. (1785) Über den Anfang der Wortsprache in psychologischer Rücksicht. Mag. Erfahrungsseelenkunde, 3, 75- . (G) (BG) (TH) (*)
Podogin, A. L. (1913) Voprosy teorii i psikhologii tvorchestva. Vol. 4. Yazyk, kak tvorchestvo. Kharkov. (A) (D) (IM) (LP) (RL) (TH)
Poetzl, O. (1926) Ueber sensorische Aphasie im Kindesalter. Z. Hals- N.- Ohrenhlk., 14, 190-216. (A) (*)
Pohlmann, H. (1911) Beitrag zur Psychologie des Schulkindes: Entwicklung des Wortverständnisses: Alter von fünf bis vierzehn Jahren. Leipzig, Nemnich. [Also in: (1912) Pädag. Monogr., 13.] (G) (SC) (*)
Polikanina, R. I., & Probatova, L. Ye. (1955) Razvitiye oriyentirovochnoy reaktzii na zvukovoye razdrazheniye u nedonoshennykh detey. Zh. vyssh. nervn. deyat., 5, 227-236. (RS) (*)
Polle, F. (1889) Wie denkt das Volk über die Sprache? Leipzig. (G) (MI) (*)
Pollock, F. (1878) An infant’s progress in language. Mind, 3, 392-401. (E) (BG) (PH) (V) (*)
Poole, I. (1934) The genetic development of articulation of consonant sounds in children’s speech. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Univer. Mich. [Also in: (1934) Elem. Eng. Rev., 11, 159-161.] (E) (PH) (*)
Popova, M. I. (1956) K voprosu ob ovladenii grammaticheskimi elementami yazyka det’mi preddoshkol’nogo vozrasta. Dissert., Moscow. (R) (GC) (*)
Popova, M. I, (1958) Grammaticheskiye elementy yazyka v rechi detey preddoshkol’nogo vozrasta. Vopr. Psikhol., 4(3), 106-117. (R) (X) (GC-G) (GC-T) (M) (PS-V)
Pos, H. J. (1925) Vom vortheoretischen Sprachbewusstsein. Phil. Anzeiger, 1, 43-57. (MI) (TH) (*)
Pos, H. J. (1934) Het affect en zijn uitdrukking in de taal. Ned. Tijdschr. Psychol., 5(6), 209-238. (DU) (SS) (*)
Post, P. (1951) Over de woordenschat van zesjarige kinderen in tweetalig Friesland. Mededelingen van het Nutsseminarium Paedag. Univer. Amsterdam (Groningen/Djakarta), No. 49. (DU) (F) (X) (FQ) (ML) (V)
Postgate, J. P. (1897) The science of meanings. Fortnightly Rev., 418-431. (SS) (V) (*)
Postma, T. (19—) Een bijdrage tot de studie van de ontwikkeling der kindertaal. School en Leven, 15, 337-. (DU) (IM)
Powers, G. R. (1962) Cineflourographic investigation of articulatory movements of selected individuals with cleft palates. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 59-69. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Powers, M. H. (1957) Functional disorders of articulation–symptomatology and etiology. In Handbook of speech pathology, ed. by L. E. Travis. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts. (LP) (PD) (*)
Prazak, F. (1945) Česke ditě, 85-100. Prague. (CZ) (BB) (BT) (FW)
Pressey, S. L. (1925) A statistical study of children’s errors in sentence structure. Eng. J., 14, 529-535. (E) (SY) (*)
Preyer, W. (1882) Die Seele des Kindes: Beobachtungen über die geistige Entwicklung des Menschen in den ersten Lebensjahren. Leipzig, Schaefer. [8th ed. 1912.] [Transl.: (1888-9) The mind of the child. New York, Appleton.] [Fr. transl.: (1887) L’âme de l’enfant. Paris, Alcan.] (G) (BG) (PH) (PS) (V)
Preyer, W. (1893) Die geistige Entwicklung in der ersten Kindheit, nebst Anweisungen für Eltern, dieselbe zu beobachten. Stuttgart, Union. [Transl.: (1893) Mental development in the child. New York/London, Appleton.] (G) (BG) (*)
Prins, T. D. (1962) Analysis of correlations among various articulatory deviations. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 152-160. (E) (PD) (PH) (*)
Prins, T. D. (1963) Relations among specific articulatory deviations and responses to a clinical measure of sound discrimination ability. J. speech hear. Disord 28, 382-388. (E) (PD) (PH) (SP) (X)
Provonost, W., & Dumbelton, C. (1953) A picture-type speech sound discrimination test. J. speech hear. Disord., 18, 258-266. (E) (ME) (PH) (*)
Provonost, W., Wakstein, M. P., & Wakstein, D. (1966) A longitudinal study of the speech behavior and language comprehension of fourteen children diagnosed atypical or autistic. Except. Child., 33, 19-26. (E) (BG) (LP) (MR) (SC) (*)
Przetacznikowa, M. (1955) Przymiotniki w mowię dziecka w wieku. In Studia pedagogiczne, Vol. 2, Wroclaw. (P) (PS-A) (SS) (*)
Przetacznikowa, M. (1956) Rozwój i rola przyslowków w mowię i myśleniu dziecka do lat trzech. Biul. Polsk. Towarzystwa Jezykoznawczego. (P) (BG) (PS-AD) (*)
Przetacznikowa, M. (1959) Odzwierciedlanie cech przedmiotów i zjawisk w mowię dzieci w wieku przedszkolnym. Krakow. (P) (BG) (PS-A) (SS) (*)
Przetacznikowa, M. (1963a) Funkcje mowy dziecka a jego aktywnosć. [Eng. abstr.: Functions of speech in the child, and his activity.] In Rozwój i wychowanie, ed. by M. Zebrowska, 106-129. Warsaw, Nasza Księgarnia. (P) (BG) (SO)
Przetacznikowa, M. (1963b) Rozwój struktury i funkcji zdan u dzieci w wieku przedszkolnym. Zeszyty naukowe Uniwer. Jagiellonskiego 75, Prace psychol.-pedag., 4. Krakow, Nakładem Uniwer. Jagiellonskiego. (SY) (*)
Puchovskiy, M. A. (1931) “Lalling” and its role in the development of children’s speech. [In Russian.] Sov. Psikhonevrol., No. 2-3, 103-106. (R) (BB) (*)
Q
Quine, W. V. O. (1960) Word and object. New York, Technology Press & Wiley. (SS) (SY) (TH)
R
Rabach, B. (1948) The speech of infants. Yidishe Sprakh, 8, 72-75. (Y) (*)
Rackstraw, S. J., & Robinson, W. P. (1967) Social and psychological factors related to variability of answering behavior in five-year-old children. Lang. & Speech, 10, 88-106. (E) (DI) (SO) (SY) (TH) (V)
Rao, T. S. (1964) Development and use of “Directions Test” for measuring degree of bilingualism.J. psychol. Res., 8, 114-119. (ME) (ML)
Raph, J. B. (1967) Language and speech deficits in culturally disadvantaged children: Implications for the speech clinician. J. speech hear. Disord., 32, 203-214. (DI) (SD) (SO) (*)
Rasmussen, V. (1913) Barnets sjælelige unvikling in de første fire aar. Copenhagen/Kristiana, Gyldendal. [Transl.: (1920) Child psychology. Vol. 1. Development in the first four years. London, Gyldendal/New York, Knopf (1923).] [Ger. transl.: (1925) Die seelische Entwicklung des Kindes in den ersten vier Lebensjahren. Leipzig, Meiner.] (DA) (BG) (*)
Rasmussen, V. (1922) Et barns dagbog. Copenhagen/Kristiana, Gyldendal. [Transl.: (19—) Diary of a child’s life from birth to the fifteenth year. London, Gyldendal.] (DA) (BG)
Ratner, S. C., Gawronski, J. J., & Rice, F. E. (1964) The variable of concurrent action in the language of children: Effects of delayed speech feedback. Psychol. Rep., 14, 47-56. (A) (E) (PH) (SP) (X) (*)
Raum, O. F. (1940) Chaga childhood: A description of indigenous education in an East African tribe. Oxford, Oxford Univer. Press. (AF) (BB) (*)
Rayevskiy, A. N. (1958) Psikhologiya rechi v sovetskoy psikhologicheskoy nauke za 40 let. Kiev, Kiev Univer. Press. (GE) (R) (U) (BI) (RL)
Redlich, F. A. (1937) Kinderspiel und Schülersprache des deutsch-baltischen Stammes in ihrer fremdsprachlichen Beeinflussung. Auslandsdtsche. Volksforsch., 305-. (G) (ML) (*)
Reichling, A. J. B. (1935) Het woord: Een studie omtrent de grondslag van taal en taalgebruik. Nijmegen, Berkhout. (DU) (*)
Reichstein, R. (1960) Study of social and geographic variation of linguistic behavior. Word, 16, 55. (F) (PH) (SO) (*)
Reimpell, E. (1912) Menschheitsbildung und Menschheitserziehung: Sprachentwicklung und Kindersprache und ihre psychologische Erforschung; aus Aufzeichnungen. Berlin/Gross/Lichterfelde, Scheffer. (G) (*)
Révész, G. (1946) Ursprung und Vorgeschicte der Sprache. Bern, Francke. (TH) (*)
Rheingold, H. L., Gewirtz, J. L., & Ross, H. W. (1959) Social conditioning of vocalizations in the infant. J. comp. Physiol. Psychol., 52, 68-73. (E) (CR) (SO) (X)
Rhoades, L. I. (1901) Bibliography of child study. Philadelphia. (BI) (*)
Rice, U. M., & di Vesta, F. J. (1965) A developmental study of semantic and phonetic generalization in paired-associate learning. Child Develpm., 36, 721-730. (E) (X) (PH) (SS)
Richter, F. (1927) Die Entwicklung der psychologischen Kindersprachforschung bis zum Beginn des 20. Jahrunderts; ein Beitrag zur Geschichte der Kinderseelenkunde. Münster, Münsterverlag. (BI) (RL)
Riegel, K. F. (1965) Age and cultural differences as determinants of word associations: Suggestions for their analysis. Psychol. Rep., 16, 75-78. (FQ) (RL) (SS)
Riegel, K. F. (1966) Development of language: Suggestions for a verbal fallout model. Human Develpm., 9, 97-120. (TH)
Riessman, F. (1962) The culturally deprived child. New York, Harper & Row. (SO)
Rigg, M. G. (1938a) The International Kindergarten Union Word List compared with eight spoken vocabularies. Child Develpm., 9, 363-364. (E) (BG) (ME) (V) (*)
Rigg, M. G. (1938b) A superior child who would not talk. Child Develpm., 9, 361- . (E) (BG) (SD) (V) (*)
Rigrodsky, S., & Goda, S. (1961) Language behavior of a group of non-speaking brain-damaged mentally retarded children. Train. Sch. Bull., 58, 52-60. (E) (MR) (*)
Rigrodsky, S., & Steer, M. D. (1961) Mowrer’s theory applied to speech habilitation of the mentally retarded. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 237-243. (E) (MR) (PD) (PH) (X)
Ringel, R. L., & Kluppel, D. D. (1964) Neonatal crying: A normative study. Folia Phoniatrica, 16, 1-9. (CR) (*)
Rinsland, H. D. (1945) A basic vocabulary of elementary school children. New York, Macmillan. (E) (FQ) (V)
Ripman, W. (1906) The sounds of spoken English. New York, Dutton. [New version 1914, 1927.] (E) (PH) (*)
Robinson, E. W., & Conrad, H. S. (1933-34) The reliability of observations of talkativeness and social contact among nursery children by the short time sample technique. J. exp. Educ., 2, 161-165. (E) (ME) (SO) (*)
Robinson, W. P., & Rackstraw, S. J. (1967) Variations in mothers’ answers to children’s questions, as a function of social class, verbal intelligence test scores, and sex. Sociology, 1, 259-276. (PA) (SO) (SX)
Roe, V., & Milisen, R. (1942) The effect of maturation upon defective articulation in elementary grades. J. speech Disord., 7, 37-50. (PD) (*)
Rolland, E. (1883) Rimes et jeux de l’enfance. Paris. (F) (*)
Romanes, G. J. (1888) Mental evolution in man: Origin of human faculty. London. [Sep. ed., New York, 1889.] [Fr. transl.: (1891) L’évolution mentale chez l’homme: Origine des facultés humaines. Paris, Alcan.] [Ger. transl.: (1893) Die geistige Entwicklung beim Menschen: Ursprung der menschlichen Befähigung. Leipzig.] (TH) (*)
Rombouts, S. (1919) De psychologie der kleutertaal. Nijmegen. (DU) (G) (BI)
Rombouts, S. (1938) Kleuterspraat en kleuterpsyche. Amsterdam. (DU) (PS) (SY)
Ronjat, J. (1913) Le développement du langage observé chez un enfant bilingue. Paris, Champion. (F) (G) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PS) (PH) (SY) (V)
Ronson, I. (1965) Incidence of visceral swallow among lispers. J. speech hear. Disord. 30, 318-324. (E) (AP) (PD) (*)
Rosenzweig, M. R., & Menahem, R. (1962) Age, sexe, et niveau d’instruction comme facteurs determinants dans les associations de mots. Année Psychol., 62, 45-61. (F) (SS) (V) (X)
Ross, A. S. C. (1937) An example of vowel-harmony in a young child. Mod. Lang. Notes, 52, 508. (PH) (*)
Rostand, F. (1951) Grammaire et affectivité. Paris. (M) (SY) (TH) (*)
Röttger, F. (1931) Phonetische Gestaltbildung bei jungen Kindern. Munich, Beck. (G) (IM) (PH) (*)
Rouma, G. (1907) La parole et les troubles de la parole. Paris, Paulin. (F) (PD) (*)
Rousey, C. L., & Averill, S. (1963) Speech disorders among delinquent boys. Bull Menninger Clin., 27, 177-184. (E) (PD) (SO) (*)
Roussey, C. (1899-1900) Notes sur l’apprentissage de la parole chez un enfant. La Parole. (F) (BG) (V) (*)
Rowe, E. C., & Rowe, H. N. (1913) The vocabulary of a child at four and six years of age. Pedag. Seminary, 20, 187-208. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Rowland, E. H. (1907) The psychological experiences connected with different parts of speech. Psychol. Rev., Monogr. Suppl., 8, 32, 36. (E) (PS) (*)
Rozengart-Pupko, G. L. (1948) Rech’ i razvitiye vospriyatiya v rannem vozraste. Moscow, Akad. Med. Nauk SSSR. (R) (SS) (V) (TH) (X) (BG) (SO)
Rozengart-Pupko, G. L. (1963) Formirovaniye rechi u detey rannego vozrasta. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (*)
Rozhdestvenskiy, N. S. (1948) Grammaticheskiye oshibki v pis’mennoy rechi glukhonemykh shkol’nikov (1-4 klassy). In Uchebnovospitatel’naya rabota v spetzial’nykh shkolakh. Vol. 1-2. Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (D) (GC-C) (SY) (*)
Rubenstein, H., & Aborn, M. (1960) Psycholinguistics. Annu. Rev. Psychol, 11, 291-322. (BI) (RL)
Rude, A. (1903) Psychologische Beobachtungen an einem Kinde. Die Kinderfehler, 8, 26-28, 74-78, 123-129, 172-180. (G) (BG) (*)
Rüdiger, J. (1934) Der Wiederholungssatz bei der Entwicklung vom Säugling zum fünfjährigen Kinde (Zugleich ein Beitrag zur Persönlichkeitsbeschreibung jüngerer Kinder). Z. Psychol., 131, 145-174. (G) (IM) (SY) (*)
Rugg, H., Krueger, L., & Sondergaard, A. (1929) Studies in child personality: 1. A study of the language of kindergarten children. J. educ. Psychol, 20, 1-18. (E) (SO) (*)
Rūķe-Draviņa, V. (1959) Zur Entstehung der Flexion in der Kindersprache: Ein Beitrag auf der Grundlage des lettischen Sprachmaterials. Internatl J. Slavic Ling. & Poetics,, 1/2, 201-222. (L) (BG) (GC-C) (GC-N) (GC-P) (GC-T) (M) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-V)
Rūķe-Draviņa, V. (1963a) Review of Language in the crib, by R. H. Weir. Linguistics, 1, 85-96. (E) (FQ) (IM) (IN) (M) (PH) (SY) (V)
Rūķe-Draviņa, V. (1963b) Sprachentwicklung bei Kleinkindern: 1. Syntax: Beitrag auf der Grundlage lettischen Sprachmaterials. Slavisk Institutionen vid Lunds Univer., Slaviska och Baltiska Studier, 6. (L) (SW) (BG) (ML) (SY) (*)
Rūķe-Draviņa, V. (1965) The process of acquisition of apical /r/ and uvular /R/ in the speech of children. Linguistics, 17, 58-68. (CZ) (L) (SW) (BG) (ML) (PD) (PH)
Runschke, E. (1940) Über die geistige, besonders sprachliche Entwicklung eines körperlich behinderten Kindes. Z. pädag. Psychol., 41, 97- . (G) (AP) (*)
Rutherford, W. J. (1909) The ætiology of congenital word-blindness. Brit. J. children’s Diseases, 484. (A) (*)
Ruttenberg, B. A., & Wolf, E. G. (1967) Evaluating the communication of the autistic child. J. speech hear. Disord., 32, 314-324. (PP) (SY) (V) (*)
Ruzskaya, A. G. (1954) Rol’ neposredstvennogo opyta i slova v obrazovanii obobshcheniya u detey doshkol’nogo vozrasta. Dissert., Moscow. (R) (SS) (TH) (*)
Ryan, W. C., Jr. (1933a) Bilingualism in the U.S.A. with special reference to North American Indians. Wld Federat. Educ. Ass., Proc., 53- . Dublin. (AI) (E) (ML) (*)
Ryan, W. C., Jr. (1933b) The Dublin meeting of the World Federation of Educational Associations. School & Society, 38, 353- . (ML) (*)
Rybnikov, N. A. (1926) Yazyk rebenka. Moscow/Leningrad, Gosizdat— Biblioteka pedagoga. (R) (FQ) (FW) (PS) (PH) (RL)
Rybnikov, N. A. (1930) Voprosy izucheniya yazyka rebenka. In Problemy sovremennoy psikhologii, Vol. 5. Moscow, Gosizdat. (R) (TH) (*)
Rybnikov, N. A. (1954) Obzor literatury po psikhologii razvitiya rechi rebenka. Sov. pedag., No. 2. (R) (RL) (*)
Rybnikova, M. A. (1926) Kniga o yazyke. 3rd ed. Moscow, Rabotnik prosveshcheniya. (R) (*)
Rybnikova-Shilova, V. A. (1923) Moy dnevnik. Orel. (R) (BG) (*)
Rzesnitzek, E. (1899) Zur Frage des psychischen Entwicklung der Kindersprache. Breslau, Aderholz. (RL) (TH)
Rzętkowska, J. (1908) Przyczynek do badań nad rozwojem mowy dziecka. Warsaw, Biblioteka Psychol. Dziecięcej, No. 1. (P) (BG) (*)
Rzętkowska, J. (1909) Przyczynek do badań nad rozwojem mowy dziecka. Warsaw, Biblioteka Psychol. Dziecięcej, No. 3. (P) (BG) (*)
S
Saareste, A. (1936) Langage enfantin conservé par trois jeunes estoniens de onze, neuf et huit ans. Tartu, Publ. Arch. Lang. Estonienne. (ES) (BL) (IL) (*)
Sabelski, J. A. (1965) A selective annotated bibliography on child language. Ling. Reporter, 7, 4-6. (BI)
Sæunnar Mal (1891) Islenzkar sögur, Sögusafn isafoldar iv. Reykjavik. (IC) (BG) (IL) (TW) (*)
Salimbene, (1250) Chronica. In Monumenta germaniae historica, scriptores, 31. (TH) (*)
Salisbury, A. (1894) A child’s vocabulary. Educ. Rev., 7, 289- . (E) (BG) (FQ) (PS) (V) (*)
Salzinger, S., Salzinger, K., Portnoy, S., Eckman, J., Bacon, P. M., Deutsch, M., & Zubin, J. (1962) Operant conditioning of continuous speech in young children. Child Develpm., 33, 683-695. (E) (RS) (X)
Sampson, O. C. (1956) A study of speech development in children of 18-30 months. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 26, 194-201. (E) (FW) (PH) (X) (*)
Sampson, O. C. (1959) The speech and language development of five-year-old children. Brit. J. educ. Psychol., 29, 217-222. (E) (X) (SO) (V) (SX)
Sanford, E. C. (1891) Notes on studies of the language of children. Pedag. Seminary, 1, 257-260. (E) (*)
Sapir, E. (1929) Nootka baby words. Internatl J. Amer. Ling., 5, 118- . (A) (PA) (*)
Sayce, C. A. (1889) Children’s language in the Omani dialect of Arabia. The Academy, 36. (AR) (*)
Schädel, E. (1905) Das Sprechenlernen unserer Kinder. Leipzig. (G) (BG) (M) (SY)
Schäfer, K. L. (1896) Wie lernt das Kind denken und sprechen? Dtsch. Rev., 21, 118-120. (G) (TH) (*)
Schäfer, K. L. (1907) Die psychologische Deutung der ersten Sprachäusserungen des Kindes. Med. pädag: Monatsschr. Ges. Sprachheilkunde, 17, Heft 11-12, 403- . (G) (BB) (CR) (*)
Schäfer, K. L. (1913) Beiträge zur Kinderforschung, insbesondere der kindlichen Sprache. Wiss. Beitr. Pädag. Psychol. (Leipzig), 4. (G) (*)
Schäfer, P. (1921) Die kindliche Entwicklungsperiode des reinen Sprachverständnisses nach ihrer Abgrenzung. Z. pädag. Psychol., 22, 317-325. (G) (FW) (RS) (SC)
Schäfer, P. (1922) Beobachtungen und Versuche an einem Kinde in der Entwicklungsperiode des reinen Sprachverständnisses. Z. pädag. Psychol23, 269-289. (G) (RS) (SC)
Schell, R. E., Stark, J., & Giddan, J. J. (1961) Development of language behavior in an autistic child. J. speech hear. Disord 32, 51-64. (E) (BG) (MR) (*)
Schiefelbusch, R. L., & Lindsay, M. J. (1958) A new test of sound discrimination. J. speech hear. Disord., 23, 153-159. (E) (ME) (PH) (*)
Schiel, C. (1940) Wie wächst die Sprache im Kinde? Westermanns Mschr., 167, 275. (G) (TH) (*)
Schilling, R. (1936) Ueber die Stimme erbgleicher Zwillinge. Klin. Wochenschr., 15, 756-757. (CR) (TW) (*)
Schlag, J. (1916) Eine Anregung für die Eltern vorschulpflichtiger Kinder. Leipziger Lehrerzeitung, No. 28. (G) (FQ) (V) (*)
Schlag, J. (1917) Grundsätzliches zu einem Häufigkeitswörterbuche der Kindersprache. Z. pädag. Psychol., 18, 216-226. (G) (FQ) (SY) (V) (*)
Schlag, J. (1921) Häufigkeitsproben aus dem Sprachschätze von sechs- bis acht-jährigen Kindern. Pädag. psychol. Arbeiten Leipziger Lehrervereins, 11, 1-67. (G) (FQ) (V) (*)
Schlanger, B. B. (1953a) Speech examination of a group of institutionalized mentally handicapped children. J. speech hear. Disord., 18, 339-349. (E) (IN) (LP) (MR) (PD) (X)
Schlanger, B. B. (1953b) Speech measurements of institutionalized mentally handicapped children. Amer. J. ment. Def., 58, 114-122. (E) (MR) (*)
Schlanger, B. B. (1954) Environmental influences on the verbal output of mentally retarded children. J. speech hear. Disord., 19, 339-343. (E) (MR) (X)
Schlanger, B. B. (1958) Speech therapy with mentally retarded children. J. speech hear. Disord., 23, 298-301. (ME) (MR) (TH)
Schlanger, B. B. (1959) A longitudinal study of speech and language development of brain damaged retarded children. J. speech hear. Disord., 24, 354-360. (E) (AP) (IM) (MR) (PH) (X)
Schleicher, A. (1861) Einige Beobachtungen an Kindern. Beitr. vergleich. Sprachforsch., 2,497- . [Supplement, 4, 128.] (G) (TH) (*)
Schlesinger, E. (1902) Über die Beziehungen zwischen Schädelgrosse und Sprachentwicklung. Dissert., Breslau. (AP) (*)
Schlesinger, I. M., Melkman, R., & Levy, R. (1966) Word length and frequency as determinants of stuttering. Psychonomic Sci., 6, 255-256. (M) (ST) (X) (*)
Schmidt, B. G. (1941) Language development as an aid to the social adjustment of mental defectives. Ment. Hyg., 25, 402-413. (MR) (*)
Schmidt, E. (1909) Die sprachlich-geistige Entwicklung des Kindes als Grundlage eines naturgemässen Unterrichts in der Muttersprache. Gotha, Thienemann. (G) (*)
Schmidt, E. (1931) Doppelte Muttersprache. Dtsche. Schule im Ausland, 60. (G) (S) (ML) (*)
Schmidt-Rohr, G. (1933) Muttersprache: Vom Amt der Sprache bei der Volkwerdung. Jena. [2nd ed.] (G) (ML) (*)
Schmidt-Rohr, G. (1936) Zur Frage der Zweisprachigkeit. Dtsche. Arbeit. (G) (ML) (*)
Schneiderman, N. (1955) A study of the relationship between articulatory ability and language ability. J. speech hear. Disord., 20, 359-364. (E) (PH) (V) (X)
Schoenrich, C. O. (1900) Aus jungamerikas Lehrjahren. Pädag. Monatshefte, 1, 20-25. (*)
Schoof, W. (1900) Die deutschen Verwandtschaftsnamen. Z. hochdtsche. Mundarten, 1, 193-298. (G) (BB) (TH) (V) (*)
Schopenhauer, A. (1813) Über die vierfache Wurzel des Sätzes vom zureichenden Grunde. (TH) (*)
Schramm, W., Lyle, J., & Parker, E. B. (1961) Television in the lives of our children. Stanford, Calif., Stanford Univer. Press. (PA) (SO) (*)
Schroeder, F. (1901) Kindersprache und Sprachgeschichte. Die Grenzboten, 60, 412-421, 455-464. (TH) (*)
Schubert, W. O., van den Heuvel, C. M., & Fulton, R. T. (1966) Effects of speech improvement on articulatory skills in institutionalized retardates. Amer. J. ment. Def, 71, 274-278. (E) (MR) (PH) (*)
Schulman, J. J., & Havighurst, R. J. (1947) Relationship between ability and social status in a midwestern community: Size of vocabulary. J. educ. Psychol., 38, 437-442. (E) (SO) (V) (*)
Schultz, F. (1880) Die Sprache des Kindes: Eine Anregung zur Erforschung des Gegenstandes. Leipzig, Günther. (G) (IM) (PH) (TH) (*)
Schultz, F. (1892) Vergleichende Seelenkunde. (TH) (*)
Schunk, P. (1900) Der Wortschatz eines dreieinvierteljährigen Kindes. Z. allg. dtsche. Sprachvereins, 15, 167- . (G) (BG) (V) (*)
Schutz, R. E., Mowrer, D., & Baker, R. L. (1964) A factor analysis of consonant articulations of children. Lang. & Speech., 7, 16-21. (E) (PH) (*)
Schwarz, F. H. C. (1802-13) Erziehungslehre. 4 vols. Leipzig. [2nd ed. 1829, 3 vols.] (TH) (*)
Scott, D. A., & Milisen, R. (1954) The effect of visual, auditory, and combined visual-auditory stimulation upon the speech responses of defective speaking children. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., 4, 38-42. (E) (PD) (PH) (X) (*)
Scupin, E., & Scupin, G. (1907) Bubis erste Kindheit: Ein Tagebuch. Leipzig, Grieben. [2nd ed. 1933.] [Dutch transl.: (1907) Broertjes eerste levensjaren: Een dagboek over de ontwikkeling van een kind. Amsterdam.] (G) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (SS) (SY) (V)
Scupin, E., & Scupin, G. (1910) Bubi im vierten bis sechsten Lebensjahr. Leipzig, Grieben. (G) (BG) (*)
Scupin, G. (1931) Tagebuch einer Mutter: Lebensbild eines deutschen Schuljungen. Leipzig, Durr. [Also in: (1931) Arch. ges. Psychol., 88, 314.] (G) (BG) (*)
Seagoe, M. V. (1965) Verbal development in a Mongoloid. Exceptional Children, 31, 269-275. (E) (BG) (FQ) (MR) (V)
Seashore, R. H. (1933) The measurement and analysis of extent of vocabulary. Psychol. Bull., 30, 709-710. (FQ) (V) (*)
Seashore, R. H. (1947) How many words do children know? The Packet, 2, 3-17. (FQ) (V) (*)
Seashore, R. H., & Eckerson, L. D. (1940) The measurement of individual differences in general English vocabularies. J. educ. Psychol., 31, 14-38. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Seashore, R. H., & Eckerson, L. D. (19–) The Seashore-Eckerson General English Recognition Vocabulary Test. Evanston, Northwestern Univer., Psychol. Dept. (E) (ME) (V) (*)
Sedláčková, E. (1964) Analyse acoustique de la voix de nouveau-né. Folia Phoniatrica, 16, 44-58. (AC) (AP) (CR) (FQ) (X)
Seegers, J. C., & Seashore, R. H. (1949) How large are children’s vocabularies? A discussion. Elem. Eng., 26, 181-194. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Seeman, M. (1937) Die Bedeutung der Zwillingspathologie für die Erforschung von Sprachleiden. Arch. Sprach-Stimmhelk., 1, 88. (AP) (LP) (TW) (*)
Seemann, M. (1955) Poruchy dětské řeči. Prague. (CZ) (PD)
Segal, E. M., & Halwes, T. G. (1965) Learning of letter pairs as a prototype of first language learning. Psychonomic Sci., 3, 451-452. (E) (ME) (TH) (X)
Segre, R. H. (1942) The development and evaluation of a pictorial technique for measuring the vocabulary of younger children. Unpubl. mast. dissert., Northwestern Univer. (ME) (V) (*)
Semenova-Boltunova, A. P. (1928) Speech of contemporary Russian proletarian and peasant children of preschool age. [In Russian.] Pedologiya, 47-60. (R) (SO) (*)
Semmig, H. (1876) Das Kind: Tagebuch eines Vaters. Leipzig. [2nd ed.] (G) (BG) (*)
Serebrennikova, N. P. (1954) Osvoyeniye rebenkom-doshkol’nikom elementov grammaticheskogo stroya. Uch. zap. Leningr. Gos. Univer., 185. (R) (M) (SY) (*)
Seth, G., & Guthrie, D. (1935) Speech in childhood: Its development and disorders. London, Oxford Univer. Press. (E) (AP) (LP) (PD) (PH) (*)
Shabad, Ye. (1925) Zhivoye detskoye slovo. Moscow. (R) (*)
Shames, G. H., & Sherrick, C. E., Jr. (1963) A discussion of nonfluency and stuttering as operant behavior. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 3-18. (RL) (ST) (TH)
Shearer, W. M., & Williams, J. D. (1965) Self-recovery from stuttering. J. speech hear. Disord., 30, 288-290. (E) (ST) (*)
Shepard, O. (1937) Pedlar’s progress: The life of Bronson Alcott. Boston, Little Brown. (E) (BG) (*)
Sheridan, M. D. (1948) The child’s hearing for speech. London. (D) (SP) (*)
Sherman, D., & Moodie, C. E. (1957) Four psychological scaling methods applied to articulation defectiveness. J. speech hear. Disord., 22, 698-706. (E) (ME) (PH) (X)
Sherman, D., Spriestersbach, D. C., & Noll, J. D. (1959) Glottal stops in the speech of children with cleft palates. J. speech hear. Disord., 24, 37-42. (E) (AP) (FQ) (PH) (X)
Sherman, I., & Kenevan, B. (1935) Kindergarten-Primary Articulation Test. Winona, Minn., Public Schools. (E) (ME) (PH) (*)
Sherman, M. (1927) The differentiation of emotional responses in infants, 2. J. comp. Psychol., 7, 335-351. (CR) (*)
Shibles, B. H. (1959) How many words does a first grade child know? Elem. Eng., 31, 42-47. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Shif, Zh. I. (1946) Podbor skhodnykh tzetovykh ottenkov i nazyvaniye tzvetov. In Voprosy psikhologii glukhonemykh i umstvenno otstalykh detey. Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (D) (MR) (SS) (V) (X) (*)
Shif, Zh. I. (1954) Ocherki psikhologii usvoyeniya russkogo yazyka glukhonemymi shkol’nikami. Moscow, Uchpedgiz. (R) (D) (*)
Shimizu, J. (1957) A study of language and thought in the child. J. educ. Psychol., 4, 225-232. (J) (SC) (X) (*)
Shinn, M. W. (1893) Notes on the development of a child: Part 1. Univer. Calif. Stud., 1, 1-178. (E) (BG)
Shinn, M. W. (1900) The biography of a baby. Boston/New York, Houghton-Mifflin. [2nd ed. 1905.] [Dutch transl.: (1907) Ruth’s eerste levensjaar. Amsterdam.] (E) (BG)
Shinn, M. W. (1901) Vocabularies of Miss Shinn’s niece. Child Study Monthly, 6, 398-400. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
Shirley, M. M. (1931-33) The first two years: A study of twenty-five babies. 3 vols. Minneapolis, Univer. Minn. Press. (E) (BG) (*)
Shirley, M. M. (1938) Common content in the speech of preschool children. Child Develpm., 9, 333-346. (E) (V) (*)
Shriner, T. H. (1967) A comparison of selected measures with psychological scale values of language development. J. speech hear. Res., 10, 828-835. (ME) (SY) (*)
Shriner, T. H., & Sherman, D. (1967) An equation for assessing language development. J. speech hear. Res., 10, 41-48. (ME) (*)
Shuy, R. W., ed. (1964) Social dialects and language learning. Champaign, Ill., Natl Counc. Teach. Eng. (E) (GC) (ML) (PH) (SO) (SY) (TH)
Shvachkin, N. (1947) Razvitiye rechi mladshego doshkol’nika. Doshkol’noye vospitaniye, 20(5), 52-56. (R) (PH) (SS)
Shvachkin, N. Kh. (1948) Razvitiye fonematicheskogo vospriyatiya rechi v rannem vozraste. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 13, 101-132. (R) (X) (PH) (SC)
Shvachkin, N. Kh. (1954a) Eksperimental’noye izucheniye rannikh obobshcheniy rebenka. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 54, 83-110. (R) (X) (SC) (SS)
Shvachkin, N. Kh. (1954b) Psikhologicheskiy analiz rannikh suzhdeniy rebenka. Izv. Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 54, 111-135. (R) (X) (SC) (SS) (SY)
Siegel, G. M. (1962a) Experienced and inexperienced articulation examiners. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 28-35. (E) (ME) (PH) (X)
Siegel, G. M. (1962b) Interexaminer reliability for mean length of response. J. speech hear. Res., 5, 91-95. (E) (ME) (MR) (*)
Siegel, G. M., & Donovan, K. E. (1964) Verbal behavior of retarded children in interpersonal assemblies with adults. Amer. J. ment. Def., 69, 244-251. (E) (MR) (SO) (X) (*)
Siegel, G. M., Winitz, H., & Conkey, H. (1963) The influence of testing instrument on articulatory responses of children. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 67-76. (E) (ME) (PH) (X)
Siertsema, B. (1960) Taalverwerving en taalontleding. The Hague. (TH)
Sievers, D. J. (1955) Development and standardization of a test of psycholinguistic growth in preschool children. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Univer. Illinois. (ME) (*)
Sievers, D. J. (1959) A study to compare the performance of brain-injured and non-brain-injured mentally retarded children on the Differential Language Facility Test. Amer. J. Ment. Def., 63, 839-847. (E) (AP) (MR) (X) (*)
Sievers, D. J., & Essa, S. H. (1961) Language development in institutionalized and community mentally retarded children. Amer. J. ment. Def., 66, 413-420. (E) (MR) (*)
Sigismund, B. (1856) Kind und Welt: Vätern, Müttern, und Kinderfreunden gewidmet: 1. Die fünf ersten Perioden des Kindesalters. Braunschweig, Vieweg. [2nd ed. 1897.] (G) (*)
Sigismund, B. (1858) Das Ich in der Kindersprache: Unterhaltungen am häuslichen Herd. [Also in: (1900) Ausgewählte Schriften. Bibliothek pädagogischer Klassiker, 39, 83-87.] (G) (*)
Sigismund, B. (1900) Die Fragen der Kinder. In Ausgewählte Schriften. Bibliothek pädagogischer Klassiker, 39, 88-93. [Also in: (1897) Kind und Welt: Vätern, Müttern, und Kinderfreunden gewidmet: I. Die fünf ersten Perioden des Kindesalters. Braunschweig, Vieweg. [2nd ed.]] (G) (*)
Sikorsky, I. A. (1902) Die Seele des Kindes nebst kurzem Grundriss der weiteren psychologischen Evolution. Leipzig. (R) (*)
Sikorsky, I. A. (1908) Die seelische Entwicklung des Kindes nebst kurzer Charakteristik der Psychologie des reiferen Alters. Leipzig, Barth. (R) (*)
Sikorsky, M. (1883) Du développement du langage chez les enfants. Arch. Neurol., 6, 319-336. (R) (AP) (M) (PH) (*)
Sikorskiy, M. (1884) O razvitii rechi u detey. Yezhenedel’naya klin. gazeta, 1, 637-648, 659-666. (R) (M) (PH) (*)
Silber, M. (1910) Reden und Denken eines Kindes. Z. Kinderforsch16, 41-50. (G) (BG) (*)
Silber-Prusse, M. (1906) Die Sprache meiner Kinder. Die Kinderfehler, 11, 242-250, 268-275. (G) (BG) (V) (*)
Simonyi, Z. (1906) Két gyermek nyelvéről. Magyar Nyelvőr, 35, 317-323. (H) (BG) (*)
Sjöholm, L. G. (1933) Handledning vid modersmålundervisningen under första och audra skolåren: vol. 2. Talövningar; Skrivning; Barnets Språkutveckling. Stockholm. (SW) (PA) (RS) (*)
Skeels, H. M., Updegraff, R., Wellman, B. L., & Williams, H. M. (1938) A study of environmental stimulation: An orphanage preschool project. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare, 15, No. 4. (Eå) (RS) (*)
Skinner, B. F. (1957) Verbal behavior. New York, Appleton-Century-Crofts. (TH)
Skorupka, S. (1949) Obserwacye nad językiem dziecka. Sprawozdania z posiedzeń Komisji Językowej Towarzystwa Naukowego Warszawskiego. Vol. 3, Warsaw. (P) (BG) (*)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1956a) Despre studierea relaţiilor dintre gîndire şi limbaj in ontogeneză, prin experimentul asociativ-verbal. Rev. Psihol., 3, 85-98. (RO) (X)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1956b) Observaţii şi cercetari experimentale cu privire la contaminari. Stud, şi cercetari ling., No. 3-4, 207-233. (RO) (SC) (X)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1957a) Aspecte ale stilului vorbirii copilului. Stud. şi cercetari ling., 275-297. (RO) (GC) (SY) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1957b) Relaţiile dintre gîndire şi limbaj în ontogeneză (3-7 ani). Bucharest, Edit. Acad. Repub. Popul. Romine. (RO) (GC) (HO) (M) (PD) (PS) (SC) (SS) (SY) (X)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1959) Limbajul ca instrument de comunicare între copiii mici (2-3 ani). Rev. psihol., 1, 69-95. (RO) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1960a) Aspecte ale relaţiilor dintre gîndire şi limbaj în însuşirea structurii gramaticale de către copiii antepreşcolari (2-3 ani). Rev. psihol., 6(2), 43-65. (RO) (GC) (PS) (SY) (X)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1960b) Review of Études sur le langage de Venfant, by M. Cohen et al. Stud. şi cercetari ling., 2, 294-295. (F)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1961a) Dialogul la copii. Bucharest, Edit. Acad. Repub. Popul. Romine. [Czech transl.: (1966) Dialog u deti. Prague, Statni Pedag. Naklad.] (RO) (SC) (SO) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1961b) Langage et contexte. The Hague, Mouton. (RO) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1961c) Nekotoryye osobennosti dialoga malen’kikh detey. Vopr. psikhol., 7(2), 97-106. [Transl.: (1960) Some features of the dialogue of small children. Prob. Psychol., No. 4, 377-387.] (RO) (SC) (SO) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1961d) The oblique cases in the evolution of child language. [In Romanian.] Stud. şi cercetari ling., 2, 215-229. [Transl.: (1962) Rev. Ling., 7, 71-90.] (RO) (GC-C) (M) (SS) (SY) (X)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1962) Particularităţi ale însuşirii structurii gramaticale de către copil, între doi şi trei ani. In Culegere de studii de psihologie, 4, 119-152. Bucharest, Edit. Acad. Repub. Popul. Romine. (RO) (GC) (PS) (SY)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1963) Review of Second phonetical study on child speech, by K. Ohnesorg. [In Czech.] Stud, şi cercetari ling., 2, 277-279. (CZ) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1965a) La dynamique des relations entre la pensée et le langage. Rev. roumaine sci. soc.: Psychol., No. 2, 167-180. [Also in: (1966) Psychol, wychowawcza (Warsaw), No. 3, 243-255.] (RO) (TH) (*)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1965b) La méthodologie psycholinguistique et quelques unes de ses applications. Rev. roumaine ling., 3, 309-316. [Also in: (1965) Stud. şi cercetari ling., 1, 131-147.] (RO) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1965c) Quelques remarques psycholinguistiques sur l’apprentissage de la langue par l’enfant. Langage et Comportement (Grenoble), No. 1, 181-193. (RO) (BB) (CR) (M) (PH) (RL) (SY) (TW)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1966a) The development of the communication function of speech. In Speech and mental development in children, 18th Internatl Cong. Psychol. (Moscow), Symposium 31, 26-33. (RO) (SC) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1966b) El dialogo en los niños. Ann. Psicol. 1964-1965, 199-206. Caracas, Univer. Centr. Venezuela. (RO) (SC) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1966c) Le dialogue chez les petits enfants: Sa signification et quelques unes de ses particularités. Bull. Psychol. (Paris), 19, 247/8-12, 688-697. (RO) (SC) (SO)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1966d) Essay on the psycho-linguistic methodology and some of its applications. Linguistics, 24, 51-72. (RO) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1966e) Quelques remarques théoriques et méthodologiques sur le problème de la forme et de la substance dans la genèse du système phonématique. Cahiers Ling, théor. appl. (Bucharest), 3, 171-179. (RO) (BB) (PH) (TH)
Slama-Cazacu, T. (1967) Sur la formation du système phonématique chez l’enfant. In To honor Roman Jakobson. The Hague, Mouton. (RO) (BB) (PH) (TH)
Slobin, D. I. (1966a) Abstracts of Soviet studies of child language. In The genesis of language: A psycholinguistic approach, ed. by F. Smith & G. A. Miller, 361-386. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (R) (RL) (BI)
Slobin, D. I. (1966b) The acquisition of Russian as a native language. In The genesis of language: A psycholinguistic approach, ed. by F. Smith & G. A. Miller, 129-148. Cambridge, Mass., M. I. T. Press. (R) (GC-C) (GC-G) (GC-T) (M) (PS) (RL) (SS) (SY) (TH)
Slobin, D. I. (1966c) Grammatical transformations and sentence comprehension in childhood and adulthood. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 5, 219-227. (E) (X) (SC) (SY)
Slobin, D. I. (1966d) Soviet psycholinguistics. In Present-day Russian psychology: A symposium by seven authors, ed. by N. O’Connor, 109-151. Oxford, Pergamon. (R) (GC) (M) (PS) (PH) (RL) (SC) (SS) (SY)
Slobin, D. I., Ed. (1967) A field manual for cross-cultural study of the acquisition of communicative competence (second draft). Berkeley, Calif., Univer. of Calif. ASUC Bookstore. (BB) (BI) (CR) (DI) (IM) (ME) (ML) (PA) (PH) (RL) (SC) (SO) (SP) (SS) (SY) (TH) (V)
Smayling, L. M. (1959) Analysis of six cases of voluntary mutism. J. speech hear. Disord., 24, 55-58. (E) (BG) (MU) (*)
Smith, F. A. (1946) The development and calibration of a pictorial vocabulary test for young children. Unpubl. mast, dissert., North- western Univer. (ME) (V) (*)
Smith, K. H., (1965) Mediation and position learning in the recall of structured letter pairs. Psychon. Sci., 2, 293-294. (SY) (TH) (*)
Smith, K. H. (1966a) Grammatical intrusions in the free recall of structured letter pairs. J. verb. Learn, verb. Behav., 5, 447-454. (SY) (TH) (X)
Smith, K. H. (1966b) Grammatical intrusions in the recall of structured letter pairs: Mediated transfer of position learning. J. exp. Psychol., 72, 580-588. (SY) (TH) (X)
Smith, K. H. (1967) Rule-governed intrusions in the free recall of structured letter pairs. J. exp. Psychol., 73, 162-164. (SY) (TH) (X)
Smith, L. Z. (1930) An experimental investigation of young children’s interest and expressive behavior: Responses to single statement, verbal repetition and ideational repetition of content in animal stories. Child Develpm., 1, 232-247. (E) (RS) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1926) An investigation of the development of the sentence and the extent of vocabulary in young children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare, 3(5). (E) (FQ) (PS-A) (PS-N) (PS-P) (PS-PP) (PS-V) (SO) (V) (X)
Smith, M. E. (1931) A study of five bilingual children from the same family. Child Develpm., 2, 184-187. (C) (E) (ML) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1933a) Bilingualism in preschool children. Wld Federat. Educ. Ass., Proc., 55. (ML) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1933b) Grammatical errors in the speech of preschool children. Child Develpm., 4, 183-190. (E) (FQ) (M) (SY) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1933c) The influence of age, sex, and situation on the frequency, form, and function of questions asked by preschool children. Child Develpm., 4, 201-213. (E) (SY) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1933d) A study of language development in bilingual children in Hawaii. Psychol. Bull., 30, 692- . (ML) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1935a) A study of some factors influencing the development of the sentence in preschool children. J. genet. Psychol., 46, 182-212. (E) (M) (SO) (SY) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1935b) A study of the speech of eight bilingual children of the same family. Child Develpm., 6, 19-25. (C) (E) (BG) (ML) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1939) Some light on the problem of bilingualism as found from a study of the progress in mastery of English among preschool children of non-American ancestry in Hawaii. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 21, 119-284. (E) (C) (J) (K) (PO) (PI) (FQ) (M) (ML) (SY) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1940) A comparison of the English vocabulary used by children of non-American ancestry in Hawaii before they reach the age of seven years with that of kindergarten children in continental U.S. J. exp. Educ., 9, 121-132. (E) (ML) (V) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1942) The English of Hawaiian children. A mer. Speech, 17, 16-24. (E) (V) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1949) Measurement of vocabularies of young bilingual children in both of the languages used. J. genet. Psychol., 74, 305-310. (C) (E) (ML) (V) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1957a) Progress in the use of English after 22 years by children of Chinese in Honolulu. J. genet. Psychol., 90, 255-258. (E) (C) (ML) (*)
Smith, M. E. (1957b) Word variety as a measure of bilingualism in preschool children. J. genet. Psychol., 90, 143-150. (E) (C) (ME) (ML) (V) (*)
Smith, M. K. (1941) Measurement of the size of general English vocabulary through the elementary grades and high school. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 24, 311-345. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Smoczyński, P. (1955) Przyswajanie przez dziecko podstaw systemu językowego. Lodz, Łódzkie Towarzystwo Naukowe, Wydział 1, No. 19. (P) (BG) (FW) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (SY) (V)
Snow, K. (1961) Articulation proficiency in relation to certain dental abnormalities. J. speech hear. Disord., 26. 209-212. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X)
Snow, K. (1963) A detailed analysis of articulation responses of “normal” first grade children. J. speech hear. Res., 6, 277-290. (E) (PD) (PH) (*)
Snow, K. (1964) A comparative study of sound substitutions used by “normal” first grade children. Speech Monogr., 31, 135-141. (E) (AC) (FQ) (PD) (PH) (X)
Snow, K., & Milisen, R. (1954a) The influence of oral versus pictorial representation upon articulation testing results. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., 4, 30-35. (E) (ME) (PD) (PH) (X) (*)
Snow, K., & Milisen, R. (1954b) Spontaneous improvement in articulation as related to differential responses to oral and picture articulation tests. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., 4, 46-49. (E) (ME) (PD) (PH) (*)
Snyder, A. D. (1914) Notes on the talk of a two-and-a-half year old boy. Pedag. Seminary, 21, 412-424. (E) (BG) (M) (SY) (V)
Soderberg, G. A. (1966) The relations of stuttering to word length and word frequency. J. speech hear. Res., 9, 584-589. (E) (ST) (*)
Sokhin, F. A. (1951) Nekotoryye voprosy ovladeniya grammaticheskim stroyem yazyka v svete fiziologicheskogo ucheniya I. P. Pavlova. Sov. pedag., No. 7. (AP) (TH) (*)
Sokhin, F. A. (1955) Nachal’nyye etapy ovladeniya rebenkom grammaticheskim stroyem yazyka. Dissert., Moscow. (*)
Sokhin, F. A. (1959) O formirovanii yazykovykh obobshcheniy v protzesse rechevogo razvitiya. Vopr. psikhol., 5(5), 112-123. (R) (X) (GC-C) (PS-PP) (SC) (SS)
Sokolov, N. (1918) Zhizn’ rebenka. Moscow. (R) (BG)
Sollier, P. (1891) Les troubles du langage dans l’idiotie et l’imbecilité. Rev. Sci., 48, 75-80. (F) (MR) (*)
Solomon, A. L. (1961) Personality and behavior patterns of children with functional defects of articulation. Child Develpm., 32, 731-737. (E) (PD) (PH) (X)
Solov’yev, I. M. (1958) O nazyvanii ob”yektov glukhonemymi shkol’-nikami. In Trudy nauehnoy sessii po voprosam defektologii. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (D) (SS) (V) (*)
Sommerfelt, A. (1929) Review of Die Kindersprache, by C. Stern & W. Stern. Norsk Tidsskrift for Sprogvidenskap, 3, 271-273. (N) (BG) (*)
Sommers, R. K., Meyer, W. J., & Fenton, A. K. (1961) Pitch discrimination and articulation. J. speech hear. Res., 4, 56-60. (E) (PD) (SC) (*)
Sortini, A. J. (1955) Twenty years of stuttering research. Except. Child., 21, 181-183. (RL) (ST) (*)
Sovak, M. (1958) Vychova levaku v rodine. Prague. (CZ) (ST)
Spearman, C. (1923) The nature of intelligence. (E) (SS) (*)
Spieler, J. (1944) Schweigende und sprachscheue Kinder: Thymogener Mutismus (Aphrasia voluntaris). Agolten, Walter. (LP) (SD) (*)
Spitz, R. A. (1957) No and yes: On the genesis of human communication. New York, Internatl Univer. Press. (CR) (NG) (PA) (*)
Spitz, R. A. (1958) La première année de la vie de l’enfant. Paris. (NG) (PA) (SP) (SS)
Spitzer, L. (1927) Puxi: Eine kleine Studie zur Sprache einer Mutter. Monatshefte ideal. Philol., April, 35-53, 101-183. (G) (BG) (PA) (*)
Spitzer, L. (1934) En apprenant le turc. Bull. Soc. Ling. Paris, 35, 82-101. (T) (PA) (RR) (*)
Spradlin, J. E. (1963) Assessment of speech and language of retarded children: The Parsons language sample. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., No. 10, 8-31. (E) (IM) (MR) (SC) (*)
Spradlin, J. E., & Rosenberg, S. (1964) Complexity of adult behavior in a dyadic situation with retarded children. J. abnorm, soc. Psychol., 68, 694-698. (X) (MR) (PA)
Spreen, O., Borkowski, J. G., & Gordon, A. M. (1966) Effects of abstractness, meaningfulness, and phonetic structure on auditory recognition of nouns. J. speech hear. Res., 9, 619-625. (E) (MR) (PS-N) (SP) (X) (*)
Spriestersbach, D. C. (1955) Assessing nasal quality in cleft palate speech of children. J. speech hear. Disord., 20, 266-270. (E) (AP) (PH) (X)
Spriestersbach, D. C. (1956) Research in articulation disorders and personality. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 329-335. (RL) (PD) (*)
Spriestersbach, D. C., Darley, F., & Morris, H. L. (1958) Language skills in children with cleft palates. J. speech hear. Res., 1, 279-285. (E) (AP) (V) (X) (*)
Spriestersbach, D. C., Darley, F. L., & Rouse, V. (1956) Articulation of a group of children with cleft lips and palates. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 436-445. (E) (AP) (LP) (PH) (X)
Spriestersbach, D. C., Moll, K. L., & Morris, H. L. (1961) Subject classification and articulation of speakers with cleft palates. J. speech hear. Res., 4, 362-372. (E) (AP) (ME) (PH) (*)
Spriestersbach, D. C., & Powers, G. R. (1959) Nasality in isolated vowels and connected speech of cleft palate speakers. J. speech hear. Res., 2, 40-45. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Springob, J. R. (1930) Factors influencing the incidence of articulatory defects in preschool children. Unpubl. mast, dissert., Univer. Minn. (PD) (*)
Staats, A. W., & Staats, C. K. (1962) A comparison of the development of speech and reading behavior with implications for research. Child Develpm., 33, 831-846. (BB) (CR) (ME) (TH)
Staats, A. W., & Staats, C. K. (1963) Complex human behavior: A systematic extension of learning principles. New York, Holt, Rinehart & Winston. (TH)
Stalnaker, E. (1933) Language of the preschool child. Child Develpm., 4, 229-236 (E) (PH) (PS) (SY) (*)
Stanchinskaya, E. I. (1924) Dnevnik materi: Istoriya razvitiya sovremennogo rebenka ot rozhdeniya do 7 let. Moscow, Novaya Moskva. (R) (BG)
Stark, J. (1966) Performance of aphasie children on the I.T.P.A. Except. Child., 33, 153-158. (E) (A) (ME) (*)
Steer, M. D., & Drexler, H. G. (1960) Predicting later articulation ability from kindergarten tests. J. speech hear. Disord., 25, 391-397. (E) (ME) (PH) (*)
Stein, L. (1922) Zur Kasuistik des kindlichen Stammeins. Mschr. Ohrenheilkunde u. Laryngo-rhinologie, 56. (ST) (*)
Steinthal, H. (1871) Einleitung in die Psychologie und Sprachwissenschaft. Berlin, Dümmler. [2nd rev. ed. 1881.] (G) (BG) (TH) (V) (*)
Stejgrle, L. (1954) Příspěvky k fysiologii a k psychologii řeči na podklade učeni I. P. Pavlova o vyssi nervove cinnosti. Sbornik praci fil. fakulty Brnenske univer., B2, 105-114. (CZ) (SC) (SP) (TH)
Stern, C., & Stern, W. (1907) Die Kindersprache: Eine psychologische und sprachtheoretische Untersuchung. Leipzig, Barth. [4th rev. ed. 1928.] (G) (BG) (FQ) (FW) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (SY) (V)
Stern, C., & Stern, W. (1909) Anleitung zur Beobachtung der Sprachentwicklung bei normalen,vollsinningen Kindern. Z. Angew. Psychol., 2, 313-339. (G) (BG) (PH) (*)
Stern, W. (1905) Helen Keller: Die Entwicklung und Erziehung einer Taubstummenblinden als psychologisches, pädagogisches und sprach- theoretisches Problem. Ziegler-Ziehensche Sammlung von Abhandlungen (Berlin), 8, Heft 2. (E) (BG) (DB) (*)
Stern, W. (1914) Psychologie der frühen Kindheit, bis zum sechsten Lebensjahre. Leipzig, Quelle und Meyer. [3rd rev. ed. 1923. 6th ed. 1930.] [Transl.: (1924) Psychology of early childhood up to the sixth year of age. New York, Holt.] (G) (BG)
Stern, W. (1928) Über Zweisprachigkeit in der frühen Kindheit. Z. angew. Psychol., 30, 168-172. (ML) (*)
Stevenson, A. (1893) The speech of children. Science, 21, 118-120. (E) (PH) (SY) (*)
Stewart, J. L. (1960) The problem of stuttering in certain North American Indian societies. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., 6, 1-87. (AI) (SO) (ST)
Stinchfield, S. M. (1921) Standardization of speech testing material. Quart. J. speech Educ., 7, 360-369. (E) (ME) (*)
Stinchfield, S. M. (1923) Practical speech measurements. Quart. J. speech Educ., 9, 77-84. (E) (ME) (*)
Stinchfield, S. M. (1923-24) The formulation and standardization of a series of graded speech tests. Psychol. Monogr., 33(2). (E) (ME) (*)
Stinchfield, S. M. (1928) The psychology of speech. Boston, Expression Co. (*)
Stinchfield, S. M., & Young, E. H. (1938) Children with delayed or defective speech: Motor-kinesthetic factors in their training. Stanford, Calif., Stanford Univer. Press. (AP) (SD) (PD) (*)
Strauss, A. A., & McCarns, E. N. (1958) A linguist looks at aphasia in children. J. speech hear. Disord., 23, 54-58. (A) (BB) (LP) (ME) (TH)
Strayer, L. C. (1930) Language and growth: The relative efficacy of early and deferred vocabulary training studied by the method of co-twin control. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 8, 209-319. (E) (TH) (TW)
Strickland, R. G. (1962) The language of elementary school children: Its relationship to the language of reading textbooks and the quality of reading selected by children. Bull., Sch. of Educ., Indiana Univer., Vol. 38, No. 4. (E) (GC) (PS) (SY) (V)
Strümpell, A. von (1916) Die Entwicklung der Sprache und die aphatischen Sprachstörungen. Z. pädag Psychol., 17, 5-21. (A) (*)
Strümpell, L. (1880) Notizen über die geistige Entwicklung eines weiblichen Kindes während der ersten zwei Lebensjahre. Appendix to Psychologische Pädagogik, 352-368. Leipzig. (G) (BG) (IM) (M) (*)
Stumpf, C. (1897) Un enfant extraordinaire. Rev. Sci., 4(7), 336-338. (G) (BG) (IL)
Stumpf, C. (1901) Eigenartige sprachliche Entwicklung eines Kindes. Z. pädag. Psychol., 3, 419-447. (G) (BG) (IL) (M) (SY) (V)
Sugar, O. (1952) Congenital aphasia: An anatomical and physiological approach. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 301-304. (A) (TH)
Sully, J. (1884) Baby linguistics. Eng. illus. Mag. (E) (BG) (*)
Sully, J. (1896) Studies of childhood. New York, Appleton/London, Longmans. [2nd ed. 1903, new ed. 1908.] (E) (BG) (PH) (PS) (SS) (SY) (V)
Sunne, D. (1933) The effect of locality on language errors. J. educ. Res., 8, 239-251. (E) (*)
Surbled, (1897) Genèse cérébro-psychique du langage articulé. Arras. (AP) (*)
Sykes, J. (1940) A study of spontaneous vocalizations of young deaf children. Psychol. Monogr., 52(1), 104-123. (D) (*)
Szuman, S. (1955) Rozwój treśći słownika dzieci. In Studie pedagogiczne, vol. 2. Wroclaw. (P) (PS-A) (SS) (*)
T
Tabouret-Keller, A. (1963) L’acquisition du langage parle chez un petit enfant en milieu bilingue. In Problèmes de psycho-linguistique. Paris, Presses Universitaires de France. (F) (BG) (DI) (FQ) (ML) (PH) (V)
Taine, H. (1870) Note sur l’acquisition du langage chez les enfants et dans l’espèce humaine. In De l’intelligence. Paris. [12th ed. 1912.] [Transl.: (1877) M. Taine on the acquisition of language by children. Mind, 2, 252-259.] [Dutch transl.: (1926) Over het aanleren van de taal door kinderen. Groningen.] (F) (BG) (M) (SS) (TH)
Taine, H. (1876) De l’acquisition du langage chez les enfants et les peuples primitifs. Rev. Phil., 1, 1-23. (F) (BG) (M) (SS) (TH)
Tanaka, N. (1964) A study on the incidence of spoken language of totally blind infants. Ann. Rep. Fac. Educ., Tohoku Univer., 12, 258-272. (J) (BL) (*)
Tanaka, N. (1965) A study of the meaning analysis of visual words of totally blind children. Ann. Rep. Fac. Educ., Tohoku Univer13, 161-174. (J) (BL) (*)
Tappolet, E. (1907) Die Sprache des Kindes. Dt sehe. Rundschau, 131. 399-411. (G) (BG) (M)
Templin, M. C. (1943) A study of sound discrimination ability of elementary school pupils. J. speech Disord., 8, 127-132. (E) (SP) (*)
Templin, M. C. (1947a) A non-diagnostic articulation test. J. speech Disord., 12, 392-396. (E) (ME) (PD) (PH) (*)
Templin, M. C. (1947b) Spontaneous versus limited verbalization in testing articulation in preschool children. J. speech Disord., 12, 293-300. (ME) (PH) (*)
Templin, M. C. (1952) Speech development in the young child: 3. The development of certain language skills in children. J. speech hear. Disord., 17, 280-285. (E) (PH) (RS) (V) (X)
Templin, M. C. (1953) Norms on a screening test of articulation for ages three through eight. J. speech hear. Disord., 18, 323-331. (E) (ME) (PH) (SO) (SX) (X)
Templin, M. C. (1954) A note on the screening test of articulation of speech sound. J. Pediatr., 45, 443-445. (ME) (PH) (*)
Templin, M. C. (1957) Certain language skills in children: Their development and interrelationships. Univer. Minn. Inst. Child Welfare Monogr. 26., Minneapolis. (E) (FQ) (GC) (PH) (SC) (SY) (V) (X)
Templin, M., & Steer, M. D. (1939) Studies on the growth of speech in preschool children. J. speech Disord., 4, 71-77. (E) (*)
Tervoort, B. T. M. (1953) Structurele analyse van visueel taalgebruik binnen een groep dove kinderen. 2 vols. Amsterdam. (DU) (BI) (D) (M) (SY) (V) (X)
Tervoort, B. T. M. (1961) Abstractie als taalkundin probleem voor dove kinderen. Inst, voor Doven St. Michielgestel (Jaarverslag), 1-61. (DU) (D)
Tervoort, B. T. M. (1967) Language development of deaf children: Some results of an 8-year project. [Partly in Dutch.] Het gehoorgestoorde Kind, 8, 214-227. (DU) (E) (D) (PS) (SY)
Tervoort, B. T. M. (19—) Speech and language development in early childhood. In The teacher of the deaf. Newbury, Newbury Weekly News, Ltd. (BI) (RL) (*)
Tervoort, B. T. M., & Verberk, A. J. A. (1961) Analysis of communicative structure pattern in deaf children. Groningen. (DU) (E) (D)
Teuber, H. -L. (1964) Formal discussion. In The acquisition of language, ed. by U. Bellugi & R. Brown. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 29(1), 131-138. (AP) (TH)
Thewrewk, E. P. (1894) A gyermeknyelvéről Budapest. (H) (*)
Thomas, D. R. (1962) Oral language sentence structure and vocabulary of kindergarten children living in low socio-economic urban areas. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Wayne State Univer. (E) (SO) (SY) (V) (*)
Thorndike, E. L. (1921) The teacher’s word book. New York, Teach. Coll., Columbia Univer. (E) (FQ) (V)
Thorndike, E. L. (1931-32) A teacher’s word book of the 20,000 words found most frequently and widely in general reading for children and young people. New York, Teach. Coll., Columbia Univer. (E) (FQ) (V)
Thorndike, E. L., & Lorge, I. (1944) A teacher’s word book of thirty thousand words. New York, Teach. Coll., Columbia Univer. (E) (FQ) (V)
Tiedemann, D. (1787) Über die Entwicklung der Seelenfähigkeiten bei Kindern. Hessische Beiträge zur Gelehrsamkeit und Kunst. [New ed., with intro, by C. Ufer, Altenburg, 1897.] [transl.: (1927) Tiedemann’s observations on the development of the mental faculties of children.Pedag. Seminary, 34, 205-230.] [Fr. transl.: (1863) Observations sur le développement des facultés de l’âme chez les enfants. J. Gén. Instruc. publique, 251, 291, 309, 319.] (G) (BG)
Tinbergen, D. C. (1919) Kinderpraat. De nieuwe Taalgids, 13, 1-16, 65-86. (DU) (BG)
Tischler, H. (1957) Schreien, Lallen und erstes Sprechen in der Entwicklung des Säuglings. Z. Psychol., 160, 210-263. (G) (BB) (CR) (FW) (PH)
Titone, R. (1964) La psicolinguistica oggi. Zürich, Pas Verlag. (RL)
Tits, D. (1948) Le méchanisme de l’acquisition d’une langue se substituant á la langue maternelle chez un enfant espagnole âgée de six ans. Brussels, Imprimerie Veldeman. (DU) (F) (S) (BG) (ML) (*)
Tögel, H. (1905) Sechzehn Monate Kindersprache. Beitr. Kinderforsch. Heilerzieh., 13.(G)(*)
Toischer, W. (1899) Die Sprache der Kinder. Prague. (BG) (*)
Tomb, J. W. (1925) On the intuitive capacity of children to understand spoken language. Brit. J. Psychol., 16, 53-55. (ML) (SC) (*)
Tondrow, M. (1954) Oral and written language of children. Calif. J. educ. Res., 5, 170-175. (E) (*)
Tonkova-Yampolskaya, R. V. (1962) On the question of studying physiological mechanisms of speech. Pavlov J. high. nerv. Act., 12, 82-87. (AP) (*)
Town, C. H. (1912-13) Language development in 285 idiots and imbeciles. Psychol. Clinic, 6, 229-235. (E) (MR) (*)
Town, C. H. (1921) An analytic study of a group of five and six-year-old children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare, 1(4). (E) (*)
Tracy, F. (1893a) The language of childhood. Amer. J. Psychol., 6, 107-138. (E) (RL) (*)
Tracy, F. (1893b) The language of children. Add. & Proc. Internatl Cong. Educ. Chicago. (E) (RL) (*)
Tracy, F. (1893c) The psychology of childhood. Boston, Heath. [7th ed. 1909.] [Ger. transl.: (1899) Psychologie der Kindheit. Leipzig. [4th ed. 1912.]] (E) (PH) (RL) (V) (*)
Travis, L. E., & Rasmus, B. J. (1931) The speech-sound discrimination ability of cases with functional disorders of articulation. Quart. J. Speech, 17, 217-226. (PD) (SP) (*)
Travnicek, F. (1931) O vyvoji dětské řeči. Sbornik 5. paedologickeho Sjezdu. Brno. (CZ) (FW) (PH)
Treitel, L. (1891) Über die Stimme kleiner Kinder. Z. Physiol5. (CR) (PH) (*)
Treitel, L. (1892) Über Sprachstörung und Sprachentwicklung, hauptsächlich auf Grund von Sprachuntersuchungen in den Berliner Kindergärten. Arch. Psychiat. Nervenkrankheiten, 24, 578. (G) (LP) (*)
Treitel, L. (1893) Über Aphasie im Kindesalter. Sammlung klinischer Vorträge (Leipzig), New Ser. 64. (A) (*)
Trettien, A. W. (1904) Psychology of language interest of children. Pedag. Seminary, 11,113-177. (BI) (MI) (TH) (*)
Turner, E. A. (1966) Developmental studies of sentence voice and reversibility. Unpubl. doct. dissert., Cornell Univer. (E) (X) (GC-M) (IM) (SC) (SY)
Turner, E. A., & Rommeveit, R. (1967a) The acquisition of sentence voice and reversibility. Child Develpm38, 649-660. (E) (GC-M) (SC) (SY) (X) (IM) (M) (PS-V)
Turner, E., & Rommeveit, R. (1967b) Experimental manipulation of the production of active and passive voice in children. Lang. & Speech, 10, 169-180. (E) (GC-M) (SY) (X)
Tylor, E. B. (1871) Primitive culture: Researches into the development of mythology, philosophy, religion, art, and custom. 2 vols. [4th ed. 1903.] [Ger. transl.: (1873) Die Anfänge der Kultur.] (TH)
U
Uhrbrock, R. S. (1935) The vocabulary of a five-year-old. Educ. Res. Bull., 14, 85-97. (E) (V) (*)
Uhrbrock, R. S. (1936) Words most frequently used by a five-year-old girl. J. educ. Psychol, 27, 155-158. (E) (FQ) (V) (*)
Updegraff, R. (1928) The visual perception of distance in young children and adults: A comparative study. Unpubl. dissert., State Univer. Iowa. (E) (SC) (SS) (V) (*)
V
Valentine, C. W. (1930) The psychology of imitation. Brit. J. Psychol., 21,
105-132. (E) (BG) (IM) (PH) (*)
Valette, R. M. (1964) Some reflections on second-language learning in young children. Lang. Learn., 14, 91-98. (E) (F) (IL) (ML) (PD)
Vandemark, A. A., & Mann, M. B. (1965) Oral language skills of children with defective articulation. J. speech hear. Res., 8, 406-414. (E) (PD) (*)
Van der Velde, see Velde.
Van Ginneken. see Ginneken.
Van Hattum, R. J. (1958) Articulation and nasality in cleft palate speakers. J. speech hear. Res., 1, 383-387. (E) (AP) (PH) (*)
Vaupel, K. (1930) Die Welt des Kindes: Die Sprache des Kindes. Das werdende Zeitalter, 9, 440-444. (G) (*)
Velde, I. van der (1931) Woordenschatonderzoekingen bij leerlingen van zesde klassen van amsterdame lagere Scholen: 1. De samenstelling van een woordtest. 2. Het verband tussen woordenschat, intelligentie en sosiaal milieu. Meded. V. H. Nutsseminarium voor Paedag. Univer. Amsterdam, No. 18. Groningen. (DU) (V) (X)
Velten, H. V. (1943) The growth of phonemic and lexical patterns in infant language. Language, 19, 281-292. (E) (BG) (GC) (M) (PH) (PS) (V)
Vermeylen, G. (1930) Un trouble rare de l’évolution du langage chez un enfant de 8 ans. J. Neurol. Psychol, 827-836. (F) (LP) (*)
Vierordt, K. von (1879) Die Sprache des Kindes. Dtsch. Rev., 3, 29-46. (G) (BB) (PH) (*)
Vierordt, K. von (1881) Sprechen. In Handbuch der Kinderkrankheiten, ed. by Gerhardt, Vol. È 454-457. (G) (LP) (*)
Villinger, E. (1911) Sprachentwicklung und Sprachstörungen beim Kinde, unter Berücksichtigung hirnanatomischer Grundlagen. Leipzig, Engelmann. (G) (AP) (LP) (SD) (*)
Vinogradov, G. (1927) Detskiye taynyye yazyki. Sibirskaya zhivaya starina, 2(6), 87-112. (R) (IL) (SO) (V)
Vinson, (1915) Observations sur le développement du langage chez l’enfant. Rev. Ling., 49, 1-39. (F) (*)
Vlahović, P. (1965) Geneza prvih izraza u dečjem govoru. Prilozi proučavanju jezika. (Novi Sad, Yugoslavia), 1. (SE) (BG) (FW) (SS) (SY)
Vlasto, P. (1933) Greek bilingualism and some parallel cases. Athens, Hestia Press. (GR) (ML) (*)
Voegelin, C. F., & Adams, S. (1934) A phonetic study of young children’s speech. J. exp. Educ., 3, 107-116. (E) (PH) (*)
Volz, W. (1907) [German-Malay bilingualism in Sumatra.] In Die Kinder spräche: Eine psychologische und sprachtheoretische Unter- suchung, by C. Stern & W. Stern. Leipzig, Barth. (G) (MY) (ML)
Von Vierordt. See Vierordt.
Vooys, C. G. N. de (1916) Jets over woordvorming en woordbeteekenis in kindertaal. De nieuwe Taalgids, 10, 93-100, 128-141. [Also in: (1925) Verzamelde taalkundige opstellen, 2, 373-399. Groningen.] (DU) (M) (V)
Vygotskiy, L. S. (1934) Myshleniye i rech’. Moscow, Sotzekgiz. [Transl.: Vygotsky, L. S. (1962) Thought and language. Cambridge, Mass./New York, M. I. T. Press & Wiley.] [Also in: (1956) Izbrannyye psikhologicheskiye issledovaniya. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR.] (R) (SC) (SS)
W
Waddle, C. W. (1913) An introduction to child psychology. New York/Boston, Houghton-Mifflin. (FQ) (PS) (V) (*)
Wahnelt, O. (1910) Kindersprache und Altersmundarten. Munich, Kellerer. (G) (DI) (*)
Waldon, E. F. (1963) A study of the spoken and written language of hearing impaired children. Doct. dissert., Ohio State Univer. (E) (X) (D) (SY) (*)
Walker, C. H. M., & Languth, P. R. (1956) Developmental speech anomalies in apparently normal children. Brit. Med. J., 1956(2), 1455-1458. (E) (SD) (*)
Walter, J. (1955) A study of the written sentence construction of a group of profoundly deaf children. Amer. Ann. Deaf, 100, 235-252. (E) (D) (SY) (*)
Ward, M. M., Malone, Sister H. D., Jann, G. R., & Jann, H. W. (1961) Articulation variations associated with visceral swallowing and malocclusion. J. speech hear. Disord., 26, 334-341. (E) (AP) (PD) (PH) (X)
Waterhouse, V. (1949) Learning a second language first. Internatl J. Amer. Ling., 15, 106-109. (AI) (S) (ML) (PH) (V) (*)
Waters, T. J. (1956) Qualitative vocabulary responses in three etiologies of mental defectives. Train. Sch. Bull., 53, 151-156. (E) (MR) (V) (*)
Watson, G. (1878) Universe of language. New York. (E) (IL) (TW)
Watson, J. (1919) Psychology from the standpoint of a behaviorist. Philadelphia/London, J. B. Lippincott. [2nd ed. 1924.] (TH)
Watson, J. (1925) Behaviorism. New York, People’s Institute. [Rev. ed., Chicago, Univer. Chicago Press, 1958.] (RS) (TH)
Watts, A. F. (1945) The language and mental development of children: An essay in educational psychology. London/Toronto/Boston, Heath. (TH) (*)
Wawrowska, W. (1938) Badania psychologiczne nad rozwojem mowy dziecka (od 1,0-2, 3 lat). Prace psychol. (Warsaw), 1. (P) (BG) (*)
Weaver, C. H., Furbee, C., & Everhajt, R. W. (1960) Paternal occupational class and articulatory defects in children. J. speech hear Disord., 25, 171-175. (E) (PD) (SO) (X)
Webster, M. J., & Shelton, R. L., Jr. (1964) Estimation of mean length of response in children of normal and below average intellectual capacity. J. speech hear. Res., 7, 101-102. (E) (ME) (*)
Wegener, P. (1885) Untersuchungen über die Grundfragen des Sprachlebens. (TH) (*)
Weinberg, B. (1964) Stuttering among blind and partially sighted children. J. speech hear. Disord., 29, 322-326. (BL) (ST) (*)
Weinreich, U. (1953) Languages in contact. New York, Ling. Circle N. Y. (BI) (ML) (RL) (SO)
Weir, R. H. (1962) Language in the crib. The Hague, Mouton. (E) (BG) (GC) (IN) (M) (MI) (PH) (Q) (PS) (SY) (V)
Weisberg, P. (1963) Social and nonsocial conditioning of infant vocalizations. Child Develpm., 34, 377-388. (CR) (X) (SO)
Weiss, A. P. (1925) A theoretical basis of human behavior. Columbus, Ohio, R. G. Adams. [2nd ed. 1929.] (TH) (*)
Wellman, B. L., Case, I. M., Mengert, I. G., & Bradbury, D. E. (1931) Speech sounds of young children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare, 5, P. 2. (E) (PH) (*)
Wells, C. O. (1942) The development of abstract language concepts in normal and deaf children. Dissert., Univer. Chicago. (D) (SS) (*)
Werner, H. (1926) Einführung in die Entwicklungspsychologie. Leipzig, Barth. (TH)
Werner, H., & Kaplan, B. (1950) Development of word meaning through verbal context: An experimental study. J. Psychol., 29, 251-257. (E) (X) (M) (SC) (SS) (SY)
Werner, H., & Kaplan, B. (1963) Symbol formation: An organismic-developmental approach to language and the expression of thought. New York, Wiley. (RL) (SS) (SY) (TH)
Wernic, H. (1878) Biografia dziecka. Warsaw (?), Ateneum. (P) (BG) (*)
Wesman, A. G., & Seashore, R. H. (1949) Frequency versus complexity of words in verbal measurement. J. educ. Psychol., 60, 395-404. (FQ) (V) (*)
West, R. (1937) The rehabilitation of speech. New York, Harper. [3rd ed. 1938.] (E) (A) (AP) (LP) (PH) (ST)
Whipple, G. M., & Whipple, Mrs. G. M. (1909) The vocabulary of a three-year-old boy, with some interpretive comments. Pedag. Seminary, 16, 1-22. (E) (BG) (V) (*)
White, A. M. (1945) When scientists listen to babies. Parents’ Mag., 20(5), 28, 116-118. (BB)(*)
Wicklund, D. A., Palermo, D. S., & Jenkins, J. J. (1965) Associative clustering in the recall of children as a function of verbal association strength. J. exp. child Psychol., 2, 58-66. (E) (X) (SS)
Williams, H. M. (1932) Some problems of sampling in vocabulary tests. J. exp. Educ., 1, 131-133. (E) (FQ) (ME) (V) (*)
Williams, H. M. (1937a) Development of language and vocabulary in young children: Part 1. An analytical study of language achievement in preschool children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare (Iowa City), 13(2), 7-18. (E) (FQ) (PH) (V) (*)
Williams, H. M. (1937b) Development of language and vocabulary in young children: Part 2. A qualitative analysis of the erroneous speech sound substitutions of preschool children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare (Iowa City), 13(2), 19-32. (E) (PH) (PD) (*)
Williams, H. M., & McFarland, M. L. (1937) Development of language and vocabulary in young children: Part 3. A revision of the Smith vocabulary test for preschool children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child Welfare (Iowa City), 13(2), 33-46. (E) (V) (*)
Williams, H. M., McFarland, M. L., & Little, M. F. (1937) Development of language and vocabulary in young children. Univer. Iowa Stud. Child
Welfare (Iowa City), 13(2). (E) (PH) (V) (*)
Williams, L. A. (1892) Children’s interest in words. Pedag. Seminary, 2, 107-110. (E) (MI) (*)
Williams, R. M., & Mattson, M. L. (1942) The effect of social groupings upon the language of preschool children. Child Develpm., 13, 233-245. (SO) (*)
Williams, W. G. (1960) The adequacy and usefulness of an objective language scale when administered to elementary school children. J. educ. Res., 54, 30-33. (E) (ME) (*)
Wilson, G. M. (1922) Language error tests. J. educ. Psychol., 13, 342-349. (E) (ME) (*)
Wilson, L. N. (1898) Bibliography of child study. Pedag. Seminary, 5, 541-589. (BI) (*)
Wilson, L. N. (1899) Bibliography of child study of the year 1898. Pedag. Seminary, 6, 386-410. (BI) (*)
Wingate, M. E. (1962) Evaluation and stuttering: 1. Speech characteristics of young children. 2. Environmental stress and critical appraisal speech. 3. Identification of stuttering and the use of a label. J. speech hear. Disord., 27, 106-114, 244-256, 368-377. [In three parts.] (RL) (ST)
Winitz, H. (1959) Language skills of male and female kindergarten children. J. speech hear. Res 2, 377-391. (FQ) (SX) (E)
Winitz, H. (1961) Repetitions in the vocalizations and speech of children in the first two years of life. J. speech hear. Disord., Monogr. Suppl., No. 7, 55-62. (E) (RR) (*)
Winitz, H. (1963) Temporal reliability in articulation testing. J. speech hear. Disord 28, 247-251. (E) (ME) (PH) (*)
Winitz, H. (1964) Research in articulation and intelligence. Child Develpm 35, 287-297. (PH) (RL)
Winitz, H., & Bellerose, B. (1963a) Effects of pretraining on sound discrimination learning. J. speech hear.Res., 6, 171-180. (E) (PH) (SP) (X)(*)
Winitz, H., & Bellerose, B. (1963b) Phoneme-sound generalization as a function of phoneme similarity and verbal unit of test and training stimuli. J.speech hear. Res., 6, 379-392. (E) (IM) (PH) (X) (*)
Winitz, H., & Irwin, O. C. (1958) Syllabic and phonetic structure of infants’ early words. J. speech hear. Res., 1, 250-256. (E) (FW) (PH) (*)
Winitz, H., & Lawrence, M. (1961) Children’s articulation and sound learning ability. J. speech hear. Res., 4, 259-268. (X) (PD) (PH)
Wischner, G. J. (1950) Stuttering behavior and learning: A preliminary theoretical formulation. J. speech hear. Disord., 15, 324-335. (ST) (TH)
Witkop, C. J., Jr., & Henry, F. V. (1963) Sjögren-Larsson syndrome and histidinemia: Hereditary biochemical diseases with defects of speech and oral functions. J. speech hear. Disord28, 109-123. (AP) (LP)
Wolfert, Dr. (1901) Zur Entwicklung der Sprache des Kindes. Die Kinderfehler, 6, 176-181. (G) (*)
Wolfert, Dr. (1903) Zur Sprachentwicklung. Die Kinderfehler, 8,. 78-80. (G)(*)
Wolff, F. E. (1897) A boy’s dictionary. Child Study Monthly, 3, 141-150. (E) (BG) (MI) (SS) (V) (*)
Wölfflin, E. (1901) Reduplikation in der Kindersprache. Z. dtsche. Wortforsch., 1, 263-264. (G) (RR) (*)
Wolski, W., & Wiley, J. (1965) Functional aphonia in a fourteen-year-old boy: A case report. J. speech hear. Disord., 30, 71-75. (E) (BG) (MU) (*)
Wood, K. S. (1946) Parental maladjustment and functional articulatory defects in children. J. speech hear. Disord., 11, 255-275. (PD) (*)
Wood, N. E. (1960) Language development and language disorders: A compendium of lectures. Monogr. Soc. Res. Child Develpm., 25, No. 3. (A) (AP) (LP) (MR) (SD) (TH) (*)
Woodrow, H., & Lowell, F. (1916) Children’s association frequency tables. Psychol. Monogr., 22, No. 97. (E) (X) (FQ) (PS) (V)
Worbois, G. M. (1942) Language development in two different rural environments. Child Develpm., 13, 175-180. (E) (SO) (*)
Wreschner, A. (1912) Die Sprache des Kindes. Zürich, Füssli. (G) (*)
Wundt, W. (1885) Die Sprache und das Denken. In Essays. Leipzig. [2nd ed. 1906.] (TH)
Wundt, W. (1896) Grundriss der Psychologie. Leipzig, Engelmann. [14th ed. 1920.] (TH)
Wundt, W. (1900) Völkerpsychologie: Eine Untersuchung der Entwick-lungsgesetze von Sprache, Mythus und Sitte. Leipzig, Engelmann. (PH) (TH) (SS) (SY) (V)
Wylie, H. L., Feranchak, P. B., & McWilliams, B. J. (1965) Characteristics of children with speech disorders seen in a child guidance center. Perceptual & motor Skills, 20, 1101-1107. (PD) (SD) (ST) (*)
Wyma, (1881) The mental development of the infant of to-day. J. psychol., Med. ment. Pathol 7, 62-69. (*)
Y
Yatabe, T. (1956) Language of children. [In Japanese.] Sogensha, Japan. (J) (*)
Yatabe, T. (1957) The language of the child. [In Japanese.] Tokyo, Sogensha. (J) (*)
Yedinack, J. G. (1949) A study of the linguistic functioning of children with articulation and reading disabilities. J. genet. Psychol., 74, 23-59. (PD) (*)
Young, C., & McConnell, F. (1957) Retardation of vocabulary in hard of hearing children. Except. Child., 23, 368-370. (E) (D) (V) (*)
Young, F. M. (1941) An analysis of certain variables in a developmental study of language. Genet. Psychol. Monogr., 23, 3-141. (E) (FQ) (PS) (SO) (SX) (*)
Young, F. M. (1942a) Certain social indices in the language of preschool subjects. J. genet. Psychol, 61, 109-123. (E) (SO) (*)
Young, F. M. (1942b) Development as indicated by a study of pronouns.J. genet Psychol, 61, 125-134. (E) (FQ) (PS-P)
Young, M. A. (1965) Audience size, perceived situational difficulty, and stuttering frequency. J. speech hear. Res., 8, 401-407. (E) (SO) (ST) (*)
Z
Zagorovskiy, P. L. (1928) Clinical methods of investigating the speech reaction of children. [In Russian.] Zh. psikhol. pedag. psikhotekhnol., 1, 96-106. (R) (ME) (RS) (*)
Zakharova, A. V. (1955) K voprosu o razvitii grammaticheskogo stroya rechi u detey doshkol’nogo vozrasta. Dissert., Moscow.
Zakharova, A. V. (1958) Usvoyeniye doshkol’nikami padezhnykh form. Dokl Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR, 2(3), 81-84. (R) (X) (GC-C) (GC-G) (PS-A) (PS-N)
Zaporozhetz, A. V. (1939) The role of elements of practice and speech in the development of thinking in children. [In Russian.] Psikhol. Doslid. (Nauk. zap. Kharkov, Derzh. Pedag. Inst.) (R) (*)
Zarębina, M. (1963) Stownictwo dziecka dwuletniego. Logopedia, 5, 57-64. (V) (*)
Zarębina, M. (1965) Ksztaitowanie się systému językowego dziecka. Wroclaw/Warsaw/Krakow. (P) (*)
Zazzo, R. (1960) Les jumeaux, le couple et la personne. Vol. 2. Paris, Presses Univer. France. (TW)
Zedier, E. Y. (1956) Effect of phonic training on speech sound discrimination and speaking performance. J. speech hear. Disord., 21, 245-249. (E) (SP) (X) (*)
Zeyeman,M. (1962) Rasstroystva rechi v detskom vozraste. Moscow, Medgiz. (LP) (*)
Zhurova, L. Ye. (1963) Razvitiye zvukovogo analiza slov u detey doshkol’nogo vozrasta. Vopr. psikhol., 9(3), 20-32. [Transl.: (1964) The development of sound analysis of words in preschool children. Sov. Psychol & Psychiat., 2(2), 11-17.] (R) (X) (PH)
Zhurova, L. Ye., & El’konin, D. B. (1963) K voprosu o formirovanii fonematicheskogo vospriyatiya u detey doshkol’nogo vozrasta. In Sensornoye vospitaniye doshkoVnikov. Moscow, Akad. Pedag. Nauk RSFSR. (R) (PH) (SP) (X)
Ziehen, T. (1898) Die Ideenassociationen des Kindes: 1. Abhandlung. In Sammlung von Abhandlungen, ed. by H. Schiller & T. Ziehen, Vol. 1, No. 6. (G) (SS) (*)
Zigler, E., Jones, L. V., & Kafes, P. (1964) Acquisition of language habits in first, second, and third grade boys. Child Develpm., 35, 725-736. (E) (SC) (X)
Zimbardo, P. G., Mahl, G. F., & Barnard, J. W. (1958) The measurement of speech disturbance in anxious children. J. speech hear. Disord., 28, 362-370. (E) (SO) (X)
Zipf, G. K. (1942) Children’s speech. Science, 96, 344- . (E) (FQ) (*)
Zipf, G. K. (1949) Human behavior and the principle of least effort: An introduction to human ecology. Cambridge, Mass., Addison-Wesley. (FQ) (TH) (*)
Zubatý, J. (1919) O českem pravopise. Naše řeč, 3, 129-136. (CZ) (IN) (SC) (SP)
Zvonitzkaya, A. S. (1941) Pskhologicheskiy analiz svyaznosti rechi v yeye razvitii. Uch. zap. Leningr. Gos. Pedag. Inst. im. Gertzena, 35, (R) (SY) (*)
Zyve, C. I. (1927) Conversation among children. Teachers College Record, 29,46-61. (E) (SO) (*)
We use cookies to analyze our traffic. Please decide if you are willing to accept cookies from our website. You can change this setting anytime in Privacy Settings.